JP7416479B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, an image is displayed when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball has passed through a passage area provided in a rolling game area. Control is executed to variably display symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, control is executed to derive and display the variably displayed symbols, and the derived and displayed symbols are combined in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), a player is provided with a system that shifts to a jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine that is equipped with a launching means for launching a plurality of moving objects upward as an effect device has been proposed (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-231974

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem in that static electricity charged on the game nail as a game component short-circuits through the through hole to an electronic component provided on the back side of the game board.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent static electricity charged in gaming components from short-circuiting to electronic components.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
The present invention
A game machine equipped with a game board on which a game ball can roll,
The game board is
A plurality of game parts formed of a chargeable member and capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball;
an electronic component including a wiring connection part connected to wiring on the back side of the game board;
a first hole for arranging a first game component;
a second hole for arranging a second game component different from the first game component;
a third hole formed near the first hole and the second hole for arranging a member including the electronic component;
The first game component is disposed in the first hole from the front side of the game board,
The second game component is disposed in the second hole from the front side of the game board,
On the back side of the game board, at least a portion is provided over the inside of the third hole, and a first wire is connected from the first game component to the wiring connection portion via the first hole. An insulating member is provided for taking a creepage distance and a second creepage distance from the second game component to the wiring connection portion via the second hole ,
The insulating member is
an inner contact portion that contacts the electronic component;
an outer contact portion that contacts the game board so as to cover an outer peripheral portion of the third hole;
A game machine characterized in that at least a portion of the inner contact portion comes into contact with the electronic component at a portion that protrudes further toward the back side of the game board from the back side of the game board .

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a moving means (for example, a launch unit 6300, etc.) capable of moving a plurality of performance bodies (for example, a performance body 6315, etc.),
The moving means is capable of moving the plurality of presentation bodies to a presentation position distant from the moving means by operating from a first position to a second position,
The transportation means is
a first moving mechanism (for example, first moving mechanism 6320, etc.) capable of moving the performance body;
a second movement mechanism different from the first movement mechanism (for example, a second movement mechanism 6330, etc.);
The plurality of performance bodies include a performance body moved by the first movement mechanism and a performance body moved by the second movement mechanism,
The second moving mechanism is capable of moving the performance body in a direction different from that of the first moving mechanism,
What are the contact surfaces with the performance body in the first moving mechanism (for example, the performance body contact surface 6321a, etc.) and the contact surfaces with the performance body in the second movement mechanism (for example, the performance body contact surface 6331a, etc.) It is adjacent to
When the moving means moves from the second position to the first position, at least a part of the surface of the second moving mechanism that comes into contact with the presentation object is closer to the presentation object in the first movement mechanism. Since the contact surface of is located lower, some of the performance bodies out of the plurality of performance bodies that were in contact with the second moving mechanism are in a position where they are in contact with the second movement mechanism due to their own weight. It is characterized in that it is possible to move from the position to the position where it contacts the first moving mechanism.

According to such a configuration, the moving means includes a first moving mechanism capable of moving the performance object, and a second moving mechanism different from the first moving mechanism. The plurality of performance bodies include a performance body that is moved by a first movement mechanism and a performance body that is moved by a second movement mechanism. The second moving mechanism can move the performance body in a direction different from that of the first moving mechanism. A contact surface with the performance body in the first moving mechanism and a contact surface with the performance body in the second movement mechanism are adjacent to each other. When the moving means moves from the second position to the first position, the surface that is in contact with the performance object is more likely to be moved during the first movement than at least a part of the surface that is in contact with the performance object in the second movement mechanism. By locating the surface of the mechanism in contact with the performance objects at a lower position, some of the performance objects among the plurality of performance objects that were in contact with the second moving mechanism may come into contact with the second movement mechanism due to their own weight. It is possible to move from the position where it was held to the position where it contacts the first moving mechanism.

As a result, when the moving means moves from the second position to the first position, a part of the presentation object is gathered by its own weight toward the contact surface with the presentation object in the first movement mechanism, and the movement means is moved from the initial position. By moving the performance object that has been moved to the performance position and gathered toward the contact surface of the first moving mechanism using different moving mechanisms, the first movement mechanism and the second movement mechanism, the performance object can be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to gather the objects in the central part where it is easy to move, and it is also possible to move the presentation objects in various directions compared to the case where the presentation objects are moved only by the first moving mechanism.
Therefore, by making it possible to move the presentation body in various directions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting presentations.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent static electricity charged in gaming components from short-circuiting to electronic components.

1 is a schematic perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention, viewed from the front side. 1 is a schematic front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing a state where a dish unit in a 1st embodiment of the present invention is separated. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the top decoration is cut away in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the right side decorative member and the left side decorative member are separated in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a schematic perspective view of the dish unit as viewed diagonally to the right. FIG. 2 is a schematic perspective view of the dish unit as viewed diagonally from the left. It is a schematic front view of a dish unit. It is a schematic side view showing the right side of a dish unit. It is a schematic side view showing the left side of a dish unit. FIG. 2 is a schematic perspective view of the dish unit viewed diagonally from below. It is an exploded perspective view of a dish unit. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the state which removed some parts of a dish unit. It is a schematic front view showing a state where some parts of the dish unit are removed. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the configuration around the speaker in the dish unit. It is an exploded perspective view for explaining the ventilation mechanism around the speaker in a dish unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the operation of the air blowing mechanism. FIG. 3 is an internal plan view for explaining the operation of the blowing mechanism. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the operation of the air blowing mechanism. FIG. 3 is an internal plan view for explaining the operation of the blowing mechanism. 1 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various tables of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative member. FIG. 3 is a schematic plan view showing an inner light guide plate in the right side decorative member. It is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the incident rear end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right side decorative member. FIG. 7 is a partially cutaway rear view showing the incident rear end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right side decorative member. FIG. 7 is a partially cutaway perspective view showing the light output front end surface of the inner light guide plate in the right side decorative member. FIG. 7 is a front view, partially cut away, showing the front end surface of the light-emitting surface of the inner light guide plate in the right side decorative member. It is an exploded perspective view of the central decoration member in a top decoration. It is an exploded perspective view of the central decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic front view showing the internal structure of the center decoration member in a top decoration. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the center decoration member in the top decoration. FIG. 7 is an exploded top view of the central decoration member in the top decoration. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic front view which shows some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the right side of some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the left side of some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic rear view which shows some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the modification of an air blowing mechanism. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a main body frame of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a mounting frame in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of a game board in a game machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the game board in the game machine based on the modification of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a mounting base in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view of a mounting base in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of a main body frame of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an optical axis of projection light emitted from a projector unit in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a cover member in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention, viewed from the back side. It is a perspective view seen from the front side of a cover member in a game machine concerning a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the game board relay board in the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, the hole for board|substrates of an attachment base, and the opening part of a cover member. FIG. 3 is a top view of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a main body frame of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a first guide gutter and a second guide gutter in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a first guide gutter and a second guide gutter in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an overall perspective view showing a payout device in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a ball passage unit included in a payout device in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing a ball passage unit in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 61 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit in a different orientation from FIG. 60; FIG. It is a top view which shows the 1st guideway of the ball path unit in the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view which shows the 2nd guideway of the ball path unit in the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing an outlet of a game board in a game machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a ball detection unit located behind an exit in a state where a game board is removed in a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the whole ball detection unit in a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a ball detection unit in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 68 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball detection unit in a different orientation from FIG. 67. FIG. FIG. 7 is an internal side view of a right side component forming a ball detection unit in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an internal side view of a left side component that constitutes a ball detection unit in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the protruding piece member which comprises the ball detection unit in the gaming machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view showing a glass door provided with a tray unit in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an overall front view showing the front of a glass door in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged perspective view showing the whole tray unit in a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a tray unit in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the dish unit in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the tray unit in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention with the saucer cover member removed. It is a perspective view of a main body, a ball extraction passage member, and a lid opening/closing part in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention, viewed from the back side. FIG. 79 is an exploded view of the diagram shown in FIG. 78; It is a perspective view of the ball extraction passage member in the game machine based on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 81 is a sectional view taken along line AA' in FIG. 80. FIG. 81 is a sectional view BB' in FIG. 80. FIG. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a ball extraction passage member in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view of a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view of a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the board case of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a side view of an upper member of a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a side view of an upper member of a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially enlarged side view of the upper member of the board case of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an internal front view of a lower member in a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a state before assembly of an upper side member and a lower side member in a board case of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the state after the upper part member and the lower part member are assembled in the board case of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a rotating state of a board case in a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a rotating state of a board case in a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which a board case is attached to a base member of a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which a board case is attached to a base member of a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which a board case is attached to a base member of a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a state before the board case is attached to the base member of the board unit of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a state before the board case is attached to the base member of the board unit of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a state before the board case is attached to the base member of the board unit of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a rotating state of a board case in a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a sealing member attached to a base member of a board unit of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view which shows the rotating state of the board|substrate case in the board|substrate unit of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view showing the front door of the game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view which shows the front door of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing the front door of the game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing a transparent plate unit in a front door of a game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing a transparent plate unit in a front door of a game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the transparent plate unit in the front door of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view showing the transparent plate unit in the front door of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view which shows the transparent plate unit in the front door of the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing the assembled state of the front door of the game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing the assembled state of the front door of the game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a firing handle of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a firing handle of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a firing handle of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded side view showing a firing handle of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a front view showing a handle grip of a firing handle of a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view showing the handle grip of the firing handle of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the base member of the firing handle of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view showing the base member of the firing handle of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the ventilation mechanism of the game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing the ventilation mechanism of the game machine concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an internal plan view showing the inside of the ventilation mechanism of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an internal plan view for explaining the operation of the ventilation mechanism of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a left side view for explaining the operation of the ventilation mechanism of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an internal plan view for explaining the operation of the ventilation mechanism of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a left side view for explaining the operation of the ventilation mechanism of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the 1st performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing the first production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view showing the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a side view which shows the 1st performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view which shows a part of 1st performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view for demonstrating the operation|movement of the 1st production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view for demonstrating the operation|movement of the 1st production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view for demonstrating the operation|movement of the 1st production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a side view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view for demonstrating the operation|movement of the 1st production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a side view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the first performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a lower movable body, a left movable body, and a right movable body in the first production unit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing a lower movable body, a left movable body, and a right movable body in the first production unit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing the right movable body in the first production unit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a part of the lower movable body and the right movable body in the first production unit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially cutaway side view showing a lower movable body, a left movable body, and a right movable body in the first production unit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing the second performance unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view which shows the 2nd production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a back view showing the second production unit in the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the upper and lower units in the second production unit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view for explaining the operation of the upper and lower units in the second production unit of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view for demonstrating the operation|movement of the upper and lower units in the 2nd production unit of the gaming machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing the principal part of the game board of the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view showing the principal part of the game board of the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the ball passage cover in the game board of the game machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a back view which shows the ball passage cover in the game board of the game machine based on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view showing the opening-and-closing unit in the game board of the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the opening/closing unit in the game board of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially cutaway perspective view for explaining the operation of the opening/closing unit in the game board of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a partially cutaway top view for explaining the operation of the opening/closing unit in the game board of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front perspective view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view showing the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a main body subunit of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an enlarged front perspective view of the vicinity of the passage gate of the game board of the game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the area around the passage gate of the game board of the game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an enlarged rear perspective view of the vicinity of the passage gate of the game board of the game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the area around the passage gate of the game board of the game machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front side exploded perspective view of the electric unit of the gaming machine based on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the electric function unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the ball passage cover of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the method of eliminating ball clogging in the ball passage cover of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the method of eliminating ball clogging in the ball passage cover of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of the presentation unit of the game machine concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front side exploded perspective view of the shutter unit of the gaming machine based on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear side exploded perspective view of the shutter unit of the gaming machine based on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view showing the open state of the shutter unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view showing the open state of the shutter unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view showing the closed state of the shutter unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of a configuration for detecting an open state of a shutter unit of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of a structure for detecting a closed state of a shutter unit of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition which detects the state of the shutter unit of the game machine concerning the 5th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the structure that restricts rearward movement of the inner shutter unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view illustrating a configuration for restricting rearward movement of an inner shutter unit of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, with the shutter unit in a closed state. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of a launch unit of a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the main body of the launch unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the main body of the launch unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention in an initial state. It is a front view showing the main body of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention when the launch unit is in a lowered state. It is a front view showing the main body subunit in a state in which the launch unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention launches the presentation object. It is a front view showing the initial state of the logo unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the movable state of the logo unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front side exploded perspective view of the logo unit of the gaming machine based on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the logo unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the initial state of the base portion of the logo unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the movable state of the base portion of the logo unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear perspective view of the slide member of the logo unit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the composition which detects the state of the logo unit of the gaming machine concerning the 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the main body subunit of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, with the logo unit in a movable state.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is intended for pachinko gaming machines in general, including enclosed type pachinko gaming machines, and pachislot gaming machines in general, but in this embodiment, pachinko gaming machines in the form shown in the figures are assumed. . First, a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described below.

"First embodiment"
<Characteristic configuration of gaming machine>
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a table frame 3 with characteristic components. The components of the front frame 3 include a right side base plate 3aa, a left side base plate 3ab, and an overall base plate 3ac, which constitute the front frame base plate, as well as a transparent plate unit 7, a plate unit 8, a top decoration 14, and a right side decorative member 15. , there is a left side decorative member 16. The dish unit 8 is attached to the lower part of the overall base plate 3ac. The top decoration 14 is attached to the upper part of the right side base plate 3aa and the left side base plate 3ab. The right side decorative member 15 is attached to the lower part of the right side base plate 3aa, and the left side decorative member 16 is attached to the lower part of the left side base plate 3ab. The main characteristic components will be explained below with reference to the drawings.

<About the plate unit 8>
As shown in FIGS. 6 to 14, the tray unit 8 includes an upper tray upper cover 8a, a lower tray cover 8b, an undercover 8c, a support member 8d, a first operation unit 9A, a second operation unit 9B, a speaker unit 10, It includes a blower mechanism 110, a light emitting unit 12, an upper plate 17, a lower plate 18, and the like. The upper plate 17 is provided at the upper left side of the support member 8d, the first operation unit 9A is provided at the upper center position of the support member 8d adjacent to the right side of the upper plate 17, and the second operation unit 9B is located at the upper center of the support member 8d. , is provided at an upper right position of the support member 8d adjacent to the right of the first operation unit 9A. The lower plate 18 is provided below the upper plate 17 at a lower left position of the support member 8d, and the speaker unit 10 is provided at the center of the lower part of the support member 8d adjacent to the right side of the lower plate 18. The mechanism 110 is provided at the lower right side of the support member 8d adjacent to the right side of the speaker unit 10, and the light emitting unit 12 is installed at the lower right side of the support member 8d adjacent to the right side of the blower mechanism 110 and the left side of the emitting device 26. It is installed at the position of The first operation unit 9A, the second operation unit 9B, the speaker unit 10, the ventilation mechanism 110, the light emitting unit 12, the upper plate 17, and the lower plate 18 are the operation members of the first operation unit 9A and the second operation unit 9B, which will be described later. It is covered with an upper plate upper cover 8a, a lower plate cover 8b, and an under cover 8c so as to expose the upper surfaces of (operation buttons), upper plate 17, and lower plate 18. The upper plate upper cover 8a, a part of the lower plate cover 8b, and the undercover 8c are removable.

[Upper plate 17 and lower plate 18]
The upper tray 17 includes an upper tray main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and a payout opening 170 for dispensing game balls to the upper tray main body 17p. The lower tray 18 includes a lower tray body 18p that can store game balls, a discharge port 180 for discharging game balls into the lower tray body 18p, and a hole for dropping game balls to the lower outside of the lower tray body 18p. It has a ball cutout part 181.

[First operation unit 9A]
The first operation unit 9A includes an operation member (operation button) 2000 that can be operated by the player, as well as a press detection sensor 2035 (not shown), an illuminated board 2183 (not shown), and the like. The operating member 2000 of the first operating unit 9A is exposed through an opening provided in the center of the upper tray upper cover 8a, and the pressing operation surface of the operating member 2000 is formed in a circular shape. This operating member 2000 is provided as a button for an operation performance that is used relatively frequently, as is clear from the performance lottery table (see FIG. 22) to be described later. The push-down detection sensor 2035 and the illumination board 2183 are connected to a sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, via wiring such as a dedicated harness (not shown). Thereby, when the operation member 2000 is pressed down, an operation signal from the press detection sensor 2035 is supplied to the sub-control board 33.

[Second operation unit 9B]
The second operation unit 9B includes, on a common board 3200, a press button 3000 for the player to operate when performing an operation performance and a cross button 3100 for the player to perform a selection operation, in addition to the ball lending button 23 and the return button 24. It is constructed. Displacement operations of the ball rental button 23, the return button 24, the push button 3000, and the cross button 3100 are detected by push detection sensors provided on the common board 3200 corresponding to each other. The common board 3200 is connected to a sub-control board 33 and a card unit device CU (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, via wiring such as a harness (not shown). As a result, when the ball lending button 23 or the return button 24 is pressed, the ball lending operation signal or the return operation signal from the press detection sensor is supplied from the common board 3200 to the card unit device CU, while the pressing button 3000 or the cross button When the button 3100 is pressed, a production operation signal and a selection operation signal from the press detection sensor are supplied from the common board 3200 to the sub-control board 33. The press button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B is exposed from an opening provided on the right side of the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the press operation surface of the press button 3000 is formed in a square shape. This press button 3000 is provided as a button for operation performance that is used relatively infrequently, as is clear from the performance lottery table (see FIG. 22) to be described later. Here, the cross button 3100 and the press button 3000 are both substantially rectangular in shape with straight sides, and the straight sides are arranged opposite to each other.

[Speaker unit 10]
The speaker unit 10 is of a bass reflex type that amplifies low-frequency sounds, and includes a speaker 10c and an enclosure 10e. The speaker 10c is provided on the front surface of the enclosure 10e, and the front portion of the speaker 10c is covered by a speaker cover 10k provided at the center of the front surface of the lower plate cover 8b. Sound generated at the front of the speaker 10c is directly transmitted to the player through the speaker cover 10k, while sound generated at the rear of the speaker 10c is temporarily confined inside the enclosure 10e.

The enclosure 10e is intended to contain the sound generated from the rear of the speaker 10c so as not to interfere with the sound generated from the front thereof, and is formed to have a relatively large volume. As shown in FIG. 14, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is formed to protrude to the upper right side of the lower tray 18. Further, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is arranged so as to be in contact with the bottom of the upper plate body 17p. Further, the lower left portion 10eb of the enclosure 10e is arranged so as to be in contact with the right end portion of the lower tray main body 18p.

As shown in FIG. 16, an opening 10ec leading to a conduit (not shown) provided inside is provided at the lower right end of the enclosure 10e. Such a conduit and opening 10ec resonate and amplify the sound emitted from the rear of the speaker 10c into the enclosure 10e, and propagate it to the outside according to the principle of so-called Helmholtz resonance. The sound propagating to the outside from the opening 10ec overlaps with the sound emitted from the front of the speaker 10c, so that it is felt as a rich and powerful bass sound. Further, when sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air flows out from the opening 10ec in conjunction with the generation of the sound. When no sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air does not flow out from the opening 10ec.

According to such a speaker unit 10, since the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e has a partially bulged shape, it is possible to secure a more sufficient volume than, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped enclosure, so that sufficient sound can be produced from the speaker 10c. It is possible to generate a powerful bass sound by applying pressure.

Moreover, when generating sound from the speaker 10c, at the same time, air can be sent out with sufficient wind pressure to the outside from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e.

Furthermore, when the speaker 10c generates sound, the entire enclosure 10e vibrates according to the sound pressure, but the upper left 10ea and the lower left 10eb of the enclosure 10e are part of the upper tray body 17p and the lower tray body 18p. Since they are in contact, the vibration is also transmitted to the entire upper plate body 17p and lower plate body 18p. As a result, even if a large number of game balls are stored in the upper tray main body 17p and the lower tray main body 18p, ball clogging of game balls coming out from the payout port 170 and the discharge port 180 can be effectively removed by vibration. It can be prevented.

[Blower mechanism 110]
The air blowing mechanism 110 switches the direction of air sent out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e, and is arranged adjacent to the right side surface of the enclosure 10e. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 19, the blower mechanism 110 includes cover members 110A and 110B that can be divided into left and right halves, a solenoid 111, a slide member 112, a link member 113, a spring 114, an opening/closing member 115, and an opening/closing detection sensor 116. has. The solenoid 111, the slide member 112, the link member 113, the spring 114, the opening/closing member 115, and the opening/closing detection sensor 116 are housed inside the cover members 110A and 110B.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the cover member 110A is provided with a space 110a that can be closed and opened by the opening/closing member 115 in a direction facing straight from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e. The lower part of the space 110a is always open regardless of whether the opening/closing member 115 is closed or opened, and a vent 8ca provided in the undercover 8c is located there (see FIG. 16). As shown in FIGS. 17 and 19, the cover member 110B is provided with an opening 110b at a position facing the space 110a. On the right side of the opening 110b, an air blowing port 80 provided in the lower right side cover 8ba, which is detachable as a part of the lower plate cover 8b, is located (see FIGS. 12, 15, and 16). As a result, when the opening/closing member 115 closes the space 110a, the wind sent out from the opening 10ec is blocked by the opening/closing member 115, and is guided below the space 110a without passing through the opening 110b. It will be destroyed. The wind guided below the space 110a is sent out to the outside through the vent 8ca of the undercover 8c. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 115 opens the space 110a, the wind sent out from the opening 10ec flows almost straight without being blocked by the opening/closing member 115, and after passing through the space 110a and the opening 110b, it flows to the right. It is sent out to the outside through the air outlet 80 of the lower side cover 8ba. The firing handle 26b of the firing device 26 is arranged at a position generally directly facing the ventilation opening 80, and the wind coming out of the ventilation opening 80 hits the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b. That is, since the flow path through which the wind flows from the opening 10ec to the firing handle 26b via the space 110a, the opening 110b, and the air outlet 80 is formed generally straight, the wind pressure can be applied to the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b. The wind can reach the player without weakening as much as possible, and the player can surely feel the wind. In addition, regardless of whether the opening/closing member 115 is in the closed or open state, the sound sent out along with the wind from the opening 10ec is emitted to the outside through either the ventilation port 80 or the ventilation port 8ca, so it is caused by Helmholtz resonance. You can fully experience deep bass without reducing the acoustic effect.

As shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, the solenoid 111 has a plunger 111a that can be extended and retracted in conjunction with on/off operations. The tip of the plunger 111a is connected to the slide member 112. The slide member 112 is movably supported by the cover member 110A along the horizontal direction. A long hole 112a is formed in the slide member 112 so as to extend in the vertical direction. A connecting portion 113a of the link member 113 is movably locked in this elongated hole 112a. The base end 113b of the link member 113 is rotatably supported by the cover member 110A, and one end of a spring 114 is locked to a portion of the link member 113 near the distal end. The other end of the spring 114 is locked to an appropriate portion of the cover member 110A. A long hole 113c is formed at the tip of the link member 113. A connecting pin 115a provided in the opening/closing member 115 is movably locked in this elongated hole 113c. The opening/closing member 115 is guided by the cover member 110A so as to be movable between a closed position in which it remains in the space 110a and an open position shifted from the space 110a. The opening/closing detection sensor 116 is configured by, for example, a touch sensor or a proximity sensor, and when the opening/closing member 115 is in the open position, a part of the link member 113 comes into contact with or approaches, thereby detecting that the space 110a is in the open state. Detect. When the opening/closing member 115 is in the closed position, the link member 113 separates from the opening/closing detection sensor 116, thereby detecting that the space 110a is in the closed state. The opening/closing detection sensor 116 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 33.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the solenoid 111 is in the OFF state and the plunger 111a is in the protruding position, the slide member 112 is positioned to the left in the figure, and the tip end side of the link member 113 is pulled by the spring 114. The opening/closing member 115 connected to the elongated hole 113c at its distal end via the connecting pin 115a remains in the closed position of the space 110a, thereby closing the space 110a. At this time, since the link member 113 is in a position separated from the opening/closing detection sensor 116, a detection signal indicating the closed state is supplied from the opening/closing detection sensor 116 to the sub-control board 33.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the solenoid 111 is turned on, the plunger 111a moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. When the plunger 111a moves to the retracted position, the slide member 112 moves to the right in the figure, and accordingly, the distal end side of the link member 113 rotates counterclockwise around the proximal end 113b against the tensile force of the spring 114. Rotate in the direction of. As a result, the opening/closing member 115 connected to the elongated hole 113c of the link member 113 via the connecting pin 115a moves from the space 110a to the retracted position on the right side in the figure, thereby opening the space 110a. Become. At this time, the link member 113 comes into contact with or comes close to the opening/closing detection sensor 116, so that the opening/closing detection sensor 116 supplies a detection signal indicating the open state to the sub-control board 33.

According to the air blowing mechanism 110, the flow path of the air from the opening 10ec to the firing handle 26b via the air outlet 80 is generally linear, and the space 110a located between the opening 10ec and the air outlet 80 is formed. is controlled to be closed/opened and the space 110a is closed, the flow of air from the opening 10ec can be guided to the vent 8ca located below the space 110a, while the space 110a is closed. In the open state, the flow of air from the opening 10ec can be linearly guided from the space 110a through the opening 110b to the air outlet 80. The wind coming out of the air outlet 80 flows further straight toward the firing handle 26b, and hits the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b. This makes it possible to not only hear the deep bass sounds but also feel the wind through the skin. When the wind from the opening 10ec is guided to the vent 8ca, the player's hand is not placed near the vent 8ca, so that, for example, only heavy bass can be felt by hearing without the player feeling the wind. .

[Light-emitting unit 12]
The light emitting unit 12 irradiates the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b with irradiation light, and is arranged diagonally above and to the left of the firing handle 26b. The light emitting unit 12 includes a plurality of LEDs as a light emitting means, a light emitting board on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, a light guide plate for guiding light from the plurality of LEDs in a predetermined direction, etc., although illustrations and descriptions of the details are omitted. It is composed of As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, in a predetermined direction in which the light from the light emitting unit 12 is guided, an irradiation window 81 is provided in the removable upper right side cover 8bb as a part of the lower plate cover 8b. There is. The light from the light emitting unit 12 passes through the irradiation window 81 and is irradiated toward the firing handle 26b, and appears as a spotlight on the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b. As a result, in addition to the wind, which appeals to the senses of the skin, and the deep bass, which appeals to the sense of hearing, the irradiated light can also stimulate the sense of sight.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 21. Note that in FIG. 21, a "switch" is abbreviated as "SW", and a "solenoid" is abbreviated as "SOL".

As shown in FIG. 21, the gaming machine includes a main control board 28 as a main control means for controlling the game, and a sub-control board 33 as a sub-control means for controlling effects according to the progress of the game. .

The main control board 28 includes a main CPU 280, a main ROM 281 which is a read-only memory, a main RAM 282 which is a readable/writable memory, an initial reset circuit 283, an I/O port 284, a command output port 285 as a command transmission means, and a reset clock pulse. It includes a generation circuit 286 and a game information output circuit 287. The main control board 28 is connected to various devices (equipment, switches, etc.).

The main CPU 280 is connected to the main ROM 281 and the main RAM 282, and has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 281.

A first starting port switch 311 disposed behind a first starting port (not shown) on the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28 . When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 311, a winning lottery is performed.

A second starting port switch 312 disposed behind a second starting port (not shown) on the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28 . When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 312, a winning lottery is performed.

These first starting port switch 311 and second starting port switch 312 determine that a prize has been won when a game ball enters the first starting port and the second starting port, and main control controls a predetermined detection signal. It is supplied to the substrate 28.

A passage gate switch 314 disposed behind a passage gate (not shown) on the game board 1 is connected to the main control board 28. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 314, it is assumed that the game ball has won at the passage gate, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display section 5A provided on the game board 1. In addition, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display section 5A, an effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 to make the player understand that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a winning result. You can do it like this.

When the passage gate switch 314 detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate, it is assumed that a prize has been won and a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control board 28. This provides the passage gate switch 314 with an opportunity to open the second starting port.

The main control board 28 is connected to a general winning opening switch 310 arranged behind a general winning opening (not shown) provided on the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general prize winning port switch 310, a preset number of prize balls are given out by the payout device 35.

The main control board 28 is connected to a first big winning hole count switch 315 arranged at the back of the first big winning hole (not shown) on the game board 1. The first big winning hole count switch 315 is for counting the number of winnings of game balls into the first big winning hole. When the winning of game balls is detected by the first big prize opening count switch 315, the payout device 35 sends a preset number of game balls as prize balls through the payout port 170 or the discharge port 180 to the upper tray 17 or the bottom. Dispense is made to the plate 18.

The main control board 28 is connected to a second grand prize opening count switch 316 arranged at the back of the second grand prize opening (not shown) on the game board 1. The second big winning hole count switch 316 is for counting the number of winnings of game balls into the second big winning hole. When a win of a game ball is detected by the second big winning port count switch 316, the payout device 35 sends a preset number of game balls as prize balls to the upper tray 17 through the payout port 170 or the discharge port 180. Or, pay out to the lower tray 18.

These first big winning hole count switch 315 and second big winning hole count switch 316 send a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 when a game ball passes through the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole. supply to.

A specific area switch 317A and a non-specific area switch 317B are connected to the main control board 28, which are arranged in a specific area and a non-specific area (not shown) inside the second big prize opening. The specific area switch 317A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a V winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the jackpot game state. The non-specific area switch 317B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a non-V winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area in the jackpot game state.

The main control board 28 includes a first big winning hole solenoid 315A that drives a first big winning hole shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the first big winning hole, and a second big winning hole shutter that opens and closes the second big winning hole. (not shown) and exclusively controls the second big prize opening solenoid 316A. As a result, the first grand prize opening shutter can be set in an open state (first aspect) in which it is easy to enter a game ball into the first major prize opening, and in a closed state (second aspect) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the first major prize opening. ), and in a situation where the first grand prize opening is at least in a closed state, the second grand prize opening shutter is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the second grand prize opening. , and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win a prize. The opening drive of the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole by the first big winning hole shutter and the second big winning hole shutter is performed by the first special symbol display section 5C provided on the game board 1 or the second special symbol display section 5C provided on the game board 1. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the special symbol display section 5D and the state is shifted to the jackpot game state.

The main control board 28 controls a blade member solenoid 313 that opens and closes a blade member (not shown) provided at the second starting port. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner in the normal symbol display section 5A, the blade member is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, making it easier to insert the game ball into the second starting port. Become.

For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol in a gaming state that is not a time-saving gaming state (non-probability variable/non-time-saving gaming state) is 1/256, and the blade member is never released. . On the other hand, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time saving game state) is, for example, 255/256, and when the winning is achieved, the blade member is opened three times for, for example, 1.3 seconds. In addition, the number of normal symbols that become winning symbols in the normal symbol game is one, and the upper limit winning count when the second starting port is opened is 10 counts (10 pieces).

The main control board 28 controls a displacement member solenoid 318 that operates to open and close a displacement member (not shown) in a specific area within the second big prize opening. As a result, when a round game in a jackpot game state is being executed, the displacement member becomes open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, making it easier for the game ball to pass through a specific area. On the other hand, if the displacement member is in the closed state even in the jackpot game state, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and it becomes easier for the game ball to pass through the non-specific area.

When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 311 while the first special symbol display section 5C or the second special symbol display section 5D is fluctuatingly displaying, the first special symbol reservation display section 5E Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being fluctuatedly displayed in the first special symbol display section 5C or the second special symbol display section 5D is stopped and displayed, the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole. Displays the number for which execution (start) of variable display of symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the first special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of reservations related to the first special symbol is started.

When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 312 while the first special symbol display section 5C or the second special symbol display section 5D is fluctuating, the second special symbol reservation display section 5F Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being fluctuated and displayed in the first special symbol display section 5C or the second special symbol display section 5D is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting hole is displayed. Displays the number for which execution (start) of the variable display of symbols is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of reservations related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set such that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbols and second special symbols may be displayed variably in the winning order in accordance with the winning order in the first starting hole and the second starting hole.

In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of reservations for which execution of the variable display of special symbols is suspended, and in this embodiment, the main CPU 280 controls the number of times when the game ball enters the first starting hole and the second starting hole. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 311 and the second starting port switch 312, the number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 (that is, 4 detected). (number of times) is stored, and the fifth and subsequent items are not stored as the pending number. At this time, when the number of reservations decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the number of reservations is added again up to four.

When the number of pending first special symbol games in the first special symbol display section 5C is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display section 5C which is being changed is stored in the main RAM 282. 1 special symbol starting memory area (0) as a starting memory, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game with a pending number of 4 is stored in the first special symbol starting memory area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 282. It is stored sequentially as a starting memory.

Similarly, regarding the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display section 5D, if the number of pending second special symbol games is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol display section 5D that is changing. The information on the second special symbol game is stored in the second special symbol starting memory area (0) of the main RAM 282 as a starting memory, and from then on, the information on the second special symbol game for which the number of reservations is four is stored in the second special symbol starting memory area (0) of the main RAM 282. 2 Special symbols are sequentially stored in the starting storage areas (1) to (4) as starting memories.

Therefore, the number of reserved game balls related to the special symbol game due to winning in the first starting hole and the second starting opening is a maximum of 8 in total, and the first special symbol pending display section 5E and the second special symbol pending display The number of pending displays by section 5F is also four.

The open state of the first big winning hole by the first big winning hole shutter determines whether the count value (number of winning game balls) by the first big winning hole count switch 315 reaches a predetermined number (for example, number of winnings 10). Alternatively, it is maintained until either one of the conditions, such as the elapse of a predefined opening time to be described later, is met. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big winning hole shutter has elapsed, the first big winning hole shutter is driven to close the first big winning hole.

Similarly, in the open state of the second grand prize opening by the second grand prize opening shutter, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second grand prize opening count switch 316 becomes a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings 10). It is maintained until either one of the following conditions is met, or a predefined opening time described below has elapsed. When the winning number of game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second grand prize opening shutter has elapsed, the second grand prize opening shutter is driven to close the second grand prize opening.

In the jackpot game state, the open state and closed state of the first jackpot and the second jackpot are repeated based on a preset jackpot opening/closing pattern (winning opening/closing pattern). In the jackpot game state, a game in which the first jackpot and the second jackpot are in the open state and closed state for a predetermined number of times based on the jackpot opening/closing pattern (winning opening/closing pattern) is called a "round game (round game)". Games). A round game (round game) is sometimes simply called a round. Regarding the state from when the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening is closed due to one round game until the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening becomes open for the next round game. is also referred to as an "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval." In one round game, each of the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole may be in an open state and a closed state multiple times. Furthermore, in one round game, the opening/closing states of the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole are exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one grand prize opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other grand prize opening is continuously kept closed.

Note that the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with a so-called small winning gaming state as a gaming state that has a different nature from the jackpot gaming state. Unlike the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small winning gaming state of this embodiment, it is defined that the second big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times. There is. Of course, in the small winning game state, an arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened once or multiple times. This small winning game state is a gaming state that is transitioned to when a small winning is won by special symbol lottery. The gaming state basically does not change before shifting to the small winning gaming state and after it ends. For example, if you win a small win in a non-probability variable gaming state and move to the small winning gaming state, the gaming state after the small winning gaming state ends will remain the same as the non-probability variable gaming state before shifting to the small winning gaming state. Therefore, there is no transition to a variable gaming state. Similarly, if you win a small win in the variable probability gaming state and move to the small winning gaming state, the gaming state after the end of this small winning gaming state will be the small winning gaming state as long as the number of games in the variable probability gaming state remains. The game remains in the variable probability gaming state before the transition to , and does not shift to the non-probability variable gaming state.

A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times), such as 1 round and 2 rounds. In one round game, if the maximum number of prizes per round is reached before the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is opened a predetermined number of times, the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening The winning hole is closed, and the round game is ended without opening the first big winning hole and the second big winning hole for the remaining number of openings.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big prize opening is in an open state in the jackpot game state, the displacement member is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern). As a result, the specific area becomes an open state and a closed state in a specific round game in a jackpot game state. In other words, in a specific round game, it is possible for a game ball to pass through a specific area and win a V prize, while in a round game other than a specific round game, even if a game ball were to land in the second grand prize opening, Also, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area. That is, the types of jackpot gaming states include jackpot gaming states that include a specific round game and jackpot gaming states that do not include a specific round game.

On the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, performance images related to the special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display section 5C and the second special symbol display section 5D are displayed. For example, during the variable display of special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display section 5C and the second special symbol display section 5D, except in specific cases, symbols consisting of numbers are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4. (Decorative pattern), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2", . . . "7" are displayed in three columns in a variable manner.

On the other hand, when the special symbols that have been variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 5C and the second special symbol display section 5D are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

In addition, in the first special symbol display section 5C and the second special symbol display section 5D, if the changed or stopped special symbol is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "jackpot". The effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to a "jackpot" in either the first special symbol display section 5C or the second special symbol display section 5D, the liquid crystal The combination of decorative symbols for performance displayed on the screen of the display device 4 becomes a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the same symbols are stopped and displayed in each of a plurality of symbol rows), and , a performance image for the jackpot is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 280 of the main control board 28 executes a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game state) when the game ball passes through a predetermined area (first starting port, second starting port) in the gaming area 1p. ) is realized.

The main ROM 281 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 280 to execute various processes such as jackpot lottery and symbol lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22, the tables stored in the main ROM 281 include a jackpot lottery table and a symbol lottery table. The jackpot lottery table is used when a jackpot lottery is performed by random number lottery.For example, if a random number of 0 to 254 is extracted from a random number range of 0 to 255, it is a loss, and if a random number of 255 is extracted, it is a jackpot. stipulates that the winner will be elected. The symbol lottery table is used to determine the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and second special symbol (special symbol 2) by random number lottery when winning a jackpot. For example, such a symbol lottery table selects a 4R normal symbol corresponding to a 4R normal jackpot when a random number value of 0 to 35 is extracted from a random number range of 0 to 99 regarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1). When a random value of 36 to 65 is extracted, a 16R normal symbol corresponding to a 16R normal jackpot is determined, and when a random value of 66 to 85 is extracted, a 4R probability variable symbol corresponding to a 4R probability variable jackpot is determined. , 86 to 99 are extracted, it is specified that a 16R variable pattern corresponding to a 16R variable jackpot is determined. In addition, the symbol lottery table determines, for example, a 4R probability variable symbol corresponding to a 4R probability variation jackpot when a random number value of 0 to 33 is extracted from the random number range 0 to 99 regarding the second special symbol (special symbol 1). However, it is stipulated that when a random number value between 34 and 99 is extracted, a 16R variable pattern corresponding to a 16R variable jackpot is determined.

The main RAM 282 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 280 and has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.). As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 280, other readable and writable storage media may be used instead of the main RAM 282.

The initial reset circuit 283 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 280.

The I/O port 284 is for transmitting input signals from various devices to the main CPU 280 and output signals from the main CPU 280 to various devices.

The command output port 285 is for transmitting various commands from the main CPU 280 to the sub control board 33.

The reset clock pulse generation circuit 286 generates clock pulses for executing timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals (eg, 2 msec).

The game information output circuit 287 is for outputting various information to the externally connected hall computer HP and external information display device ED.

The various devices connected to the main control board 28 include a first big winning hole solenoid 315A, a second big winning hole solenoid 316A, a blade member solenoid 313, a displacement member solenoid 318, and an external terminal board 320.

The external terminal board 320 is referred to as an outer end board for short, and is an external information display device ED that has functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, or a hall that manages a plurality of gaming machines installed in the hall. This is for data communication with external equipment such as a computer HP.

Various switches connected to the main control board 28 include a general winning opening switch 310, a first starting opening switch 311, a second starting opening switch 312, a passing gate switch 314, a first big winning opening count switch 315, a second A big prize opening count switch 316, a specific area switch 317A, a non-specific area switch 317B, and a backup clear switch 319 are included.

The backup clear switch 319 is used to clear the backup data of the main control board 28 and the payout/launch control board 34 to be described later, in response to an operation by the hall manager, in the event of a power outage or the like.

Further, the main control board 28 is connected to the firing device 26, the paying-out device 35, and the card unit device CU via the paying-out/firing control board 34.

The main control board 28 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout/launch control board 34. The payout/launch control board 34 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 35, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 35, and the card unit device CU.

The card unit device CU is connected to a second operating unit 9B that outputs a signal requesting rental of game balls in response to a player's operation, and is capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from the second operating unit 9B. be.

The payout/launch control board 34 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control board 28 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit device CU, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 35. This causes the payout device 35 to pay out game balls. The payout device 35, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning ball to the first starting opening or the second starting opening, and sends them to the general winning opening, the first grand winning opening, or the second grand winning opening. Ten game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls for each winning ball.

When the firing handle 26b of the firing device 26 is grasped by the player and rotated clockwise, the payout/firing control board 34 activates a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation. It supplies power and performs control to fire game balls toward the game area 1p.

The sub-control board 33 is connected to the main control board 28 and is configured to be supplied with various commands from the main control board 28.

The sub-control board 33 performs various controls, mainly controls related to production operations, in response to various commands supplied from the main control board 28, and includes a sub-CPU 330, a program ROM 331, a work RAM 332, and a command input port 333. , a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC: Real-Time Clock") 334, a display control circuit 335, an audio control circuit 336, a light emission control circuit 337, and a production device control circuit 338. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 335. The sound control circuit 336 is connected to speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. A lamp and various LEDs (collectively referred to as lamp/LED 260 in FIG. 21) are connected to the light emission control circuit 337. The performance device control circuit 338 is connected to various movable performance accessories and movable mechanisms for movable members (collectively referred to as a movable performance device 270 in FIG. 21).

Further, the sub-control board 33 is connected to the first operating unit 9A, and can receive signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the first operating unit 9A. For example, when a press detection sensor detects that the operation member (operation button) 2000 is pressed, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation member 2000 is input from the press detection sensor to the sub-control board 33. The sub-control board 33 is also connected to the second operation unit 9B, and can receive signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the second operation unit 9B. For example, when a press detection sensor detects that the press button 3000 is pressed, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the press button 3000 is input from the press detection sensor to the sub-control board 33.

The sub CPU 330 executes various processes, mainly processes related to performance operations, according to programs stored in the program ROM 331. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means. In particular, the sub CPU 330 controls the entire sub control board 33 according to various commands supplied from the main control board 28.

The program ROM 331 stores programs and various tables mainly used by the sub CPU 330 to control various effects.

For example, as shown in FIG. 22, the table stored in the program ROM 331 includes an effect lottery table. The production lottery table includes, for example, a production related to air blowing using the speaker unit 10 and the ventilation mechanism 110 (air blowing production), a production related to light irradiation using the light emitting unit 12 (light irradiation production), an operation member 2000 or a press button 3000. It is used when performing a performance lottery by random number lottery to determine whether or not to perform various performances such as operation performances (first operation performance, second operation performance) using . Note that when the air blowing effect is executed, a sound effect that generates bass using the speaker 10c is also executed at the same time. The first operation performance is a performance using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A, and the second operation performance is a performance using the press button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B.

Specifically, the production lottery table uses ventilation effects, light irradiation effects, and operation effects in the event of a loss in the jackpot lottery, a 4R regular jackpot win, a 16R regular jackpot win, a 4R sure-variable jackpot, or a 16R probability-variable jackpot. A lottery value is defined for determining whether or not to execute each performance by a random number lottery (a lottery using random numbers in the range of 0 to 99).

According to such a performance lottery table, for the ventilation performance, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, "no performance" is always determined by extracting a random number between 0 and 99, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, When a random number between 0 and 30 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, while when a random number between 31 and 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined, and in the case of a 16R normal jackpot, a value between 0 and 95 is determined. When a random number is extracted, “no effect” is determined, while when a random number between 96 and 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined, and in the case of a 4R probability variable jackpot, a random number between 0 and 50 is extracted. If a random value between 51 and 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined. In the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, when a random value between 0 and 50 is extracted, “with effect” is determined. "No effect" is determined, while "with effect" is determined when a random number between 51 and 99 is extracted.

Regarding the light irradiation effect, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, "no effect" will be determined if a random number between 0 and 90 is extracted, while "with effect" will be determined when a random number between 91 and 99 is extracted. is determined, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, if a random number between 0 and 90 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random number between 91 and 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined, In the case of a 16R regular jackpot, "with effect" is determined by always extracting a random number between 0 and 99, and in the case of a 4R guaranteed variable jackpot, "no effect" is determined when a random number between 0 and 90 is extracted. On the other hand, if a random number between 91 and 99 is extracted, it is determined that there is an effect, and in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot, a random number between 0 and 99 is always extracted and it is determined that there is an effect. .

Regarding the first operation performance, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, if a random number between 0 and 95 is extracted, "no performance" will be determined, while when a random number between 96 and 99 is extracted, "with performance" will be determined. ” is determined, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, if a random number between 0 and 50 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, while when a random number between 51 and 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined. , in the case of a 16R regular jackpot, if a random number between 0 and 50 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random number between 51 and 99 is extracted, it is determined that there is an effect, resulting in a 4R probability variable jackpot. In this case, if a random number between 0 and 85 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, while when a random number between 86 and 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined, and in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot, 0 When a random number value between 95 and 95 is extracted, "no effect" is determined, while when a random number value between 96 and 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined.

Regarding the second operation effect, if the jackpot lottery result is a loss, "no effect" is determined by always extracting a random number between 0 and 99, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot, a random number between 0 and 97 is extracted. If a random number between 98 and 99 is extracted, it will be determined that there is an effect, and in the case of a 16R normal jackpot, a random number between 0 and 99 will always be extracted. In the case of a 4R fixed-variable jackpot, "no effect" is determined when a random number between 0 and 90 is extracted, while when a random value between 91 and 99 is extracted, "with effect" is determined. ” is determined, and in the case of a 16R variable jackpot, if a random number between 0 and 60 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, while when a random number between 61 and 99 is extracted, “with effect” is determined. Ru.

According to such a performance lottery table, the combination pattern in which performances such as the air blowing performance, the light irradiation performance, the first operation performance, and the second operation performance occur simultaneously differs in probability depending on the type of loss or jackpot. In other words, it is possible to easily predict the type of loss or jackpot depending on the combination pattern of effects that occur.

Furthermore, as is clear from the stipulations regarding the operation performance, the first operation performance using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A is better than the second operation performance using the push button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B. appears more frequently. That is, since the press button 3000 used in the second operation effect is used less frequently than the operation member 2000 used in the first operation effect, the cross button that is disposed near the press button 3000 and is unrelated to the operation effect. In addition to preventing erroneous operation of buttons such as 3100, by providing the frequently used operating member 2000 in an independent operating unit, the wiring and board can be easily specially designed.

The work RAM 332 serves as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 330 and stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.).

The command input port 333 receives various commands sent from the main CPU 280 of the main control board 28 and transmits them to the sub CPU 330.

The RTC 334 inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time to the sub CPU 330. The RTC 334 normally operates using the power from the gaming machine when power is being supplied to the gaming machine, and when the gaming machine is powered off, the RTC 334 operates using a backup power supply mounted on a power supply board (not shown). It operates using power supplied from Thereby, the RTC 334 can measure the current date and time even when the power to the gaming machine main body is turned off. Note that the RTC may be operated by a battery provided on the sub-control board. Further, as an alternative to the RTC, a counter provided in a work RAM having a function as a backup RAM may be used as a means for measuring time by counting up at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 ms).

The display control circuit 335 is for controlling the display in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 330, and includes, for example, a video data processor (VDP) and a circuit for generating various image data. It consists of an image data ROM that stores data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A converter that converts image data into an image signal. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 335 is just an example, and is not limited to this.

The display control circuit 335 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 330. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various presentation image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 335 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to a D/A converter (not shown) at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies this image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on an image signal from the D/A converter.

The sound control circuit 336 is for controlling sounds such as music and voices generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and includes a sound source IC that controls sound output, and a sound data ROM that stores various sound data. , includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the sound signal. Note that the configuration of the sound control circuit 336 is also just an example, and is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and selects one sound from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 330. Sound data can be selected.

The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. Note that this amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c.

The light emission control circuit 337 is for controlling lamps/LEDs 260 including decorative lamps, etc., and includes a drive circuit for supplying a light emission control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, etc. It consists of Note that the configuration of the light emission control circuit 337 is also just an example, and is not limited to this.

The performance device control circuit 338 controls performance operations such as activating movable performance accessories in the jackpot game state, for example.

<About the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16>
The right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 are formed in a shape that is generally symmetrical with respect to each other, and both are configured with similar members. In the following description, the right decorative member 15 will be described for convenience.

The right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 provide a light effect when predetermined game conditions are met. As shown in FIGS. 23 to 28, the right side decorative member 15 includes a support member 150, a light emitting board (not shown), an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide member 152, and a decorative cover 153. The support member 150, the light emitting board, the outer light guide member 151, and the inner light guide member 152 are covered with a decorative cover 153. The main front part of the decorative cover 153 is semi-transparent or transparent and has light transmittance.

The support member 150 and the light emitting board are attached to the right base plate 3aa. A light emitting substrate is arranged on the back side of the support member 150. A plurality of slits 150a are formed in the support member 150, and a plurality of LEDs (not shown) provided on a light emitting substrate are positioned facing the plurality of slits 150a. An outer light guide member 151 and an inner light guide member 152 are attached to the front part of the support member 150 along the plurality of slits 150a. The LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 20 mm to 30 mm) in consideration of securing the amount of light and cost.

The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are each made of a plate-like member, and the inner light guide member 152 is formed to be larger than the outer light guide member 151. The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are located apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the left and right directions. The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 have the same configuration except for the size and arrangement, so in the following description, for convenience, the inner light guide member 152 will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 28, the inner light guide member 152 has an entrance rear end surface 152a that is a light entrance surface, and an exit front end surface 152b that is a light exit surface. The incident rear end surface 152a is arranged so as to face the plurality of slits 150a of the support member 150. Thereby, the plurality of LEDs are arranged so as to be lined up along the longitudinal direction of the incident rear end surface 152a. The emission front end surface 152b is arranged along the inner surface of the decorative cover 153, and is entirely curved.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the rear entrance surface 152a is provided with sawtooth lens cuts that are uneven along the longitudinal direction. Thereby, the light from the LED that has passed through the slit 150a and entered the incident rear end surface 152a travels inside the inner light guide member 152 while being diffused generally in the longitudinal direction. A so-called diamond-cut lens cut is formed on the output front end surface 152b. Thereby, the light that has progressed from the incident rear end surface 152a into the inside of the inner light guide member 152 is irradiated forward with a certain degree of spread. Note that the output front end surface 152b of the inner light guide member 152 is arranged closer to the player's position than the output front end surface of the outer light guide member 151.

According to the right side decorative member 15, the light traveling inside can be efficiently diffused from the output front end surface 152b without leaking to the side, and the light can be produced so as to effectively stimulate the visual sense. can be executed. Since the left side decorative member 16 has the same configuration as the right side decorative member 15, it can effectively improve visual perception at the same time as the right side decorative member 15 produces light, or at a different timing from the right side decorative member 15. It is possible to perform a stimulating light display.

<About top decoration 14>
As shown in FIG. 4, the top decoration 14 includes a center decoration unit 14a, a right side decoration unit 14b, and a left side decoration unit 14c. The right side decorative unit 14b and the left side decorative unit 14c are formed in a shape that is generally symmetrical to each other, and both include similar members. In the following description, for convenience, the center decoration unit 14a and the right side decoration unit 14b will be explained.

[Central decoration unit 14a]
The central decoration unit 14a has an inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front and produces a light effect by emitting light at the start of a jackpot, for example. As shown in FIGS. 29 to 33, the central decoration unit 14a includes a main body cover 140, a front cover 141, an upper cover 142, a support member 143, a light emitting board 144, a light shielding member 145, and a plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c. . The support member 143, the light emitting substrate 144, the light shielding member 145, and the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are covered by the main body cover 140, the front cover 141, and the upper cover 142. The front portion 141a of the front cover 141 is semi-transparent or transparent and has light transmittance. The front portion 141a is a surface that protrudes forward from the bottom to the top, and is arranged to form a light-transmitting surface that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

A support member 143 is attached to the inside of the main body cover 140. A light emitting board 144 is attached to the front part of the support member 143, and a light shielding member 145 is attached so as to be located in front of the light emitting board 144. A plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are attached to the lower part of the light shielding member 145 at a predetermined distance from each other.

A plurality of LEDs 144a corresponding to a plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are provided at the lower front surface of the light emitting board 144, and a plurality of LEDs 144a corresponding to the plurality of light guiding members 146a to 146c are provided at the upper front surface of the light emitting board 144. A plurality of LEDs 144b are provided corresponding to the openings 145c.

A partition wall 145a is formed in the light shielding member 145 so as to partition an upper part and a lower part thereof. A plurality of slits 145ba, 145bb, and 145bc are formed in the lower part of the light shielding member 145 so as to correspond to the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c. A plurality of openings 145c are formed in the upper part of the light shielding member 145 so that LEDs 144b of a light emitting board 144, which will be described later, are exposed. The upper surface of the partition wall 145a of the light shielding member 145 has a surface finish that easily reflects the light from the LED 144b toward the front, and the peripheral edge of the opening 145c also has a concave surface to easily reflect the light from the LED 144b toward the front. It is formed in the shape of

Each of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c is formed of a plate-like member, and is formed into a substantially U-shape or a substantially V-shape when viewed from the front. The plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are formed to be smaller as the light guide member 146b is smaller than the light guide member 146b. The member 146c is smaller. The plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are located apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

As shown in FIG. 33, the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c have rear entrance surfaces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca that serve as light entrance surfaces, and front exit surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb that serve as light exit surfaces. The rear incident surfaces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca are arranged to face the slits 145ba, 145bb, and 145bc of the light shielding member 145. The emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb are arranged along the front part 141a of the front cover 141 that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

The rear entrance surfaces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca are formed in a sawtooth shape so as to have irregularities along the longitudinal direction, similar to the rear entrance surface 152a of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15 described above. As a result, the light from the LED 144a that has entered the rear incident surfaces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca travels inside the light guide members 146a to 146c while being diffused generally in the longitudinal direction. The front output surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb are formed in a so-called diamond-cut shape, similar to the front output surface 15b of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15 described above. As a result, the light that has traveled from the incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca into the light guide members 146a to 146c is irradiated forward with a certain degree of spread.

According to the central decoration unit 14a, the light emitted from the front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c is guided outward through the front surface 141a of the front cover 141. However, the output front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb are located relatively close to the front surface portion 141a, and a long and narrow region with relatively strong light intensity is formed along the output front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb. In the lower region of the front cover 141, the light from the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb appears in a plurality of lines. On the other hand, in the upper region of the front cover 141, the light from the plurality of LEDs 144b is diffusely reflected by the periphery of the opening 145c of the light shielding member 145, and is radiated outward through the front part 141a of the front cover 141. , since the light is guided to the front surface 141a as reflected light from the far back with respect to the front surface 141a than the output front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb of the light guide members 146a to 146c, the average It appears as a wide light distribution where the light spreads out. That is, from diagonally below the front cover 141, which is the player's line of sight, a line-shaped light appears to stand out three-dimensionally from below in the uniformly vague light from above.

[Right side decorative unit 14b]
The right side decoration unit 14b performs an effect by emitting sound or emitting light at the start of a jackpot, for example. As shown in FIGS. 34 to 39, the right side decorative unit 14b includes a speaker unit 10A, a main body support member 147A, a main body cover 147B, a front cover 147C, a light emitting board 148, and a light guide member 149. The speaker unit 10A and the light emitting board 148 are attached to the rear part of the main body support member 147A, and the light emitting board 148 is attached to the front part of the speaker unit 10A. The light guide member 149 is attached inside the front side of the main body support member 147A, and is covered by the front cover 147C. The front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape, and the vibration surface of the speaker 10b and the light guide member 149 are visible through the gap.

The speaker unit 10A has an opening (not shown) that exposes the vibration surface (sound output part) of the speaker 10b toward the front, and a light emitting board 148 is attached along the periphery of this opening. A plurality of LEDs 148a are provided on the light emitting board 148 so as to be arranged in a ring along the periphery of the speaker 10b.

An opening 147Aa is formed in the main body support member 147A to expose the vibration surface of the speaker 10b and the plurality of LEDs 148a of the light emitting board 148, and to which a light guide member 149 can be attached to the periphery.

The light guide member 149 includes a cylindrical portion 149a for guiding the sound generated on the vibration surface of the speaker 10b forward, an incident rear end surface 149b that is on the rear side of the periphery of the cylindrical portion 149a and serves as a light incident surface, and a periphery of the cylindrical portion 149a. It has an emission front end surface 149c that is on the front side and serves as a light emission surface, and a protrusion 149d that extends and extends forward from the periphery of the emission front end surface 149c.

A vibrating surface of the speaker 10b is arranged at the rear of the cylindrical portion 149a, and the sound generated on the vibrating surface is guided forward through the cylindrical portion 149a. The incident rear end surface 1449b is arranged to face the LED 148a of the light emitting board 148. The rear entrance surface 149b is formed in a sawtooth shape so as to be uneven along the circumferential direction, similar to the rear entrance surface 152a of the inner light guiding member 152 of the right decorative member 15 described above. Thereby, the light from the LED 148a that has entered the incident rear end surface 149b travels through the cylindrical portion 149a while being diffused generally in the circumferential direction.

The emission front end surface 149c is located a predetermined distance rearward from the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C. The output front end surface 149c is also formed in a sawtooth shape so as to have irregularities along the circumferential direction, similarly to the entrance rear end surface 149b. Thereby, the light that has proceeded from the incident rear end surface 149b to the cylindrical portion 149a is irradiated forward so as to appear ring-shaped while spreading mainly in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.

The protruding portion 149d is formed so that a portion on both left and right sides partially extends forward, and the protruding portion 149d is arranged such that its tip abuts the back side of the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C. Note that the protrusion 149d may be arranged close to the back side of the front surface 147Ca without being in contact with it. Further, instead of the protruding portion 149d, the output front end surface 149c may be arranged so as to be in contact with the back side of the front surface 147Ca, or may be arranged so as to be close to the front surface 147Ca.

According to the right side decoration unit 14b, it is possible to create an effect in which the area around the speaker 10b appears to shine in a ring shape in accordance with the sound generated from the speaker 10b. Further, since the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape, it is easily damaged by external impact or pressure, but it is reinforced and supported by the contact with the protrusion 149d of the light guide member 149. This allows it to effectively prevent damage from external impact or pressure. In other words, the mesh-like (lattice-like) front cover 147C allows the sound from the speaker 10b to be guided along the light guide member 149 to the back surface of the front cover 147C, so that the sound from the speaker 10b can be transmitted without any hindrance without spoiling the aesthetic appearance. It can be communicated to the outside world. Furthermore, since the light guide member 149 functions as a support member for the front cover 147C, the rigidity of the front cover 147C can be increased.

According to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained.

According to the configuration of the speaker unit 10 and its surroundings, an air flow flows out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e as sound is output from the speaker 10c. At this time, when the opening/closing member 115 of the ventilation mechanism 110 is in the state where the space portion 110a is opened, the airflow from the opening 10ec is guided in a direction straight toward the ventilation port 80, and from the ventilation port 80 toward the firing handle 26b. The wind flows with sufficient wind pressure. As a result, the player can feel the wind in his hand holding the firing handle 26b, and can also feel the sound from the speaker 10c to be deep bass due to the Helmholtz resonance with the sound output from the air outlet 80 along with the wind.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 115 of the ventilation mechanism 110 closes the space 110a and the airflow from the opening 10ec is guided in a direction that curves downward at a substantially right angle to the space 110a, the Wind is exhausted from the vent 8ca of the cover 8c, and is no longer guided to the firing handle 26b. As a result, the player can feel only the sound from the speaker 10c as deep bass due to the Helmholtz resonance with the sound output from the vent 8ca along with the wind, without feeling the wind in the hand holding the firing handle 26b. .

That is, by simply switching the direction of the air flowing out from the opening 10ec of the speaker unit 10 using the blower mechanism 110, it is possible to make the user feel both bass and wind, or only the bass, thereby making the speaker unit 10 smaller and simpler. It is possible to flexibly perform performances using sound and wind while aiming for the same.

In addition, by simply switching the direction of the air coming out of the opening 10ec of the speaker unit 10 using the blower mechanism 110, it is possible to make the user feel the sound and the wind, or only the sound. Since the air outlet 80 and the air outlet 8ca are formed in the air outlet 8c and the air blower mechanism 110 is arranged between these and the speaker unit 10, the manufacturing cost can be reduced for the speaker unit 10 and its surrounding configuration. It is possible to achieve excellent design flexibility and maintainability.

In addition, even the speaker unit 10 of a bass reflex type with a relatively large volume of the enclosure 10e can be placed in a space where it does not interfere with the hands of the player who handles the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 18. , the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space for the speaker unit 10.

Further, the upper left 10ea of the enclosure 10e abuts the bottom of the upper pan body 17p and the lower left 10eb abuts the lower pan body 18p, so that it supports the upper pan 17p and also supports the sound from the enclosure 10e in response to the operation of the speaker 10c. The vibrations are transmitted to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 18, and the clogging of the game balls in the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 18 can be effectively eliminated by this vibration.

Furthermore, the first operation effect using the operation member 2000 is set to occur more frequently than the second operation effect using the press button 3000. In other words, the operation member 2000 that is used more frequently is operated. While it is provided independently in the unit 9A, a press button 3000 that is used infrequently is provided on a common board 3200 that also serves as the ball rental button 23 and the return button 24, so the operating member 2000 and the press button can be placed in an easy-to-use position depending on the frequency of use. By arranging the buttons 3000 individually, wiring to each board can be simplified, and as a result, manufacturing costs and arrangement space can be reduced.

In addition, the frequently used operation member 2000 can be remembered as a circular shape, while the less frequently used press button 3000 can be easily remembered as a rectangular shape different from the circular shape. can be provided as an easily distinguishable external shape, which in turn makes it easier to use a plurality of operating means. Furthermore, since the rectangular push button 3000 and the cross-shaped push button 3100 are arranged adjacent to each other so that some of their linear ends face each other, even in a narrow space, a plurality of these buttons can be easily pressed. buttons can be placed.

In addition, when the conditions for transitioning to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a 16R normal jackpot or a 16R variable probability jackpot, are met, a light irradiation effect is always executed, and a ventilation effect may be executed at the same time, so the player is able to sense that a light irradiation effect or air blowing effect is being executed by either visual or tactile sense of the hand holding the firing handle 26b, and shifts to an advantageous gaming state without missing such a effect. can sense what is going on. Further, when the air blowing effect is executed, a sound effect using deep bass sounds from the speaker 10c is also executed at the same time, and the vibrations caused by the deep bass sounds can also be felt.

Further, for example, in the right side decorative member 15, at the incident rear end surfaces 152a of the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152, the light is diffused and incident in the longitudinal direction where the LEDs are lined up by sawtooth lens cuts. While the light travels efficiently within the light guide, at the front output end face 152b of the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152, the light guided from the rear end face 152a of incidence into the light guide is passed through a diamond-cut lens. Since the light can be efficiently scattered outward by cutting, color unevenness can be eliminated and light can be efficiently irradiated.

Further, for example, in the right side decorative unit 14b, the protrusion 149d of the light guide member 149 is arranged so as to come into contact with the back surface of the mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C, and the output front end surface 149c is separated from the front surface 147Ca by a predetermined distance. Since the speaker 10b is arranged in an annular manner along its periphery so as not to obstruct its vibration surface, the LED 148a located on the side of the rear end surface 149b of incidence can be hidden from view from the front of the front cover 147C, without spoiling the aesthetic appearance. Sound from the speaker 10b can be emitted outward without any problem.

Further, for example, in the central decoration unit 14a, the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb of the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are located at a distance farther from the light emitting substrate 144 than the peripheral edge of the opening 145c of the light shielding member 145 where the LED 144b is exposed. Since the light from the LED 144b is diffusely reflected at the peripheral edge of the opening 145c and guided forward, the light from the LED 144b passes through the body of the light guide members 146a to 146c and is disposed near the front face 141a of the front cover 141. , 146bb, 146cb, the light of the LED 144a is on average diffused light and line-shaped light, which can cause a clear difference in the visibility of these lights, and even create novel light. It is possible to realize the performance of

Note that as a modification of the blowing mechanism 110, one shown in FIG. 40 may be applied. The blowing mechanism 110 shown in FIG. 40 is provided with a rotatable shutter member 117 that can exclusively open and close the lower part of the space 110a and the opening 110b. As shown in FIG. 40(a), the shutter member 117 is positioned in a horizontal position when guiding the flow of wind from the opening 10ec (not shown) to the opening 110b. At this time, the wind is completely no longer guided below the space 110a. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40(b), when guiding the wind flow from the opening 10ec (not shown) to the lower part of the space 110a, the shutter member 117 is rotated from the horizontal position shown in FIG. 40(a). position so that it moves and assumes an upright position. At this time, the flow of wind that tends to go straight to the side of the space 110a is obstructed, and the wind is guided to curve downward at a substantially right angle to the space 110a. According to such a blower mechanism 110, when guiding the wind to the blower port 80 (not shown), the wind can be guided to the blower port 80 with sufficient wind pressure without leaking downward to the space 110a. I can do it.

“Second embodiment”
FIGS. 41 to 84 are diagrams illustrating the pachinko gaming machine Y according to the second embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine Y according to the second embodiment has a body frame having a different configuration from the front frame 3 (see FIG. 1), and includes two projector units arranged in the vertical direction. Note that the pachinko game machine Y according to the second embodiment has the configuration of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and can obtain the same effects as the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, unless there is a contradiction.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view of the pachinko game machine Y, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine Y. The pachinko game machine Y includes a main body frame (outer frame) 2, a main unit 400 rotatably supported on the main body frame 2, a game board 1A attached to the front side of the main unit 400, and a game board 1A. A glass door 5 is attached to the main unit 400 on the front side of the main unit 400.

[Main body and glass door]
The main body frame 2 as an outer frame has the same configuration as the second embodiment, and the main body unit 400 can be rotated near one side edge around a main body frame hinge 2b as a rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction. It is pivoted on. The glass door 5 has the same configuration as the glass door 30 of the second embodiment, and is provided with a pan unit 900, which will be described later, at the bottom.

[Body frame]
FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit 400. The main body unit 400 includes a mounting frame 410 arranged on the front side, a cover member 430 attached to the back side of the mounting frame 410 and capable of accommodating gaming machine components, and a space between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430. and a mounting base 420 provided in the.

[Mounting frame]
FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting frame 410. The mounting frame 410 has a pair of vertical frames 411 and a pair of horizontal frames 412, and has a substantially rectangular appearance. The mounting frame 410 has a storage tank 415, and is attached with a screen portion b4 onto which light irradiated by a projector unit b (described later) is projected, a game board 1A, a firing device 26, and the like. Further, on the back side of the mounting frame 410, a ball detection unit 800 (see FIG. 43), which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the outlet 55 (see FIG. 42) of the game board 1A. Moreover, the pair of vertical frames 411 each have a fixing part 411a (see FIG. 43) on the back side to which the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430 can be fixed separately.

A game board movable stopper 413 for removably fixing the game board 1A is attached to the inner surface of the pair of vertical frames 411, respectively. The game board movable stopper 413 is fixed at an arbitrary position in the vertical direction along the vertical frame 411. The game board movable stopper 413 removably clamps the side edge of the game board 1A. With such a game board movable stopper 413, for example, the lower side of the game board 1A is locked to a locking part such as a groove disposed at the lower part of the mounting frame 410, and the vicinity of both ends of the upper side is made to be movable. By holding the game board 1A with the fasteners 413, it becomes possible to fix the game board 1A to the mounting frame 410.

Furthermore, screen stops 414 for removably fixing the screen portion b4 are attached to the inner surfaces of the pair of vertical frames 411, respectively. The screen stopper 414 is fixed along the vertical frame 411 at an arbitrary position in the vertical direction. A cover member 430 is attached to the back side of the mounting frame 410 so as to cover the game board movable stopper 413 and the screen stopper 414. The game board movable stopper 413 and the screen stopper 414 may be configured to be movable on the vertical frame 411 and may be configured to be fixed at any position. By attaching a jig for fixing game members such as the game board 1A and performance devices such as the screen part b4 to the vertical frame 411 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, it can be adjusted according to the size and type of the game components and performance devices. Since it is possible to change the type and position of the jig, various layouts of the gaming machine are possible.

[Game board]
FIG. 45 is a top view of the game board 1A. The game board 1A has the same configuration as the general game board 1, and further has the following configuration. The game board 1A includes a game area 1p, and the first big prize opening solenoid 53b etc. provided on the back side (back side) of the game board 1A and the wiring part of the first big prize opening solenoid 53b etc. are connected. It has a game board relay board 101. Further, the game board 1A is made of a transparent material, has a screen sheet attached to the back side, and functions as a screen onto which projection light emitted from a projector unit b, which will be described later, is projected.

The game board relay board 101 is attached to a vertical base 101A extending toward the back side at a substantially right angle to the surface on which the game area 1p of the game board 1A is formed, on the back side (rear side), so that the game board 1A erected at approximately right angles to the The game board relay board 101 is provided with a connector connection portion 101a to which a connector for electrically connecting to another board is connected.

In addition, the game board relay board 101 is extended to a position where connection operation to the connector connection part 101a is possible from the outside of the cover member 430 via an opening 432e of the cover member 430 (described later), and at least With the outer portion of the panel relay board 101 covered by the cover member 430, the connector connection portion 101a is arranged such that the wiring insertion port 101b faces an opening 432e of the cover member 430, which will be described later. There is. The connector connection portion 101a functions as an example of a game board connector connection portion, and is connected to a relay board connector connection portion 100a (see FIG. 51), which is an example of a specific component connector connection portion of a relay board 100 (see FIG. 51), which will be described later. Connected by a member (cable).

FIG. 46 is a top view of a modification of the game board 1A. In FIG. 46, a portion of the game board 1A where the vertical base 101A is provided is shown in an enlarged manner. The game board relay board 101 of the modified example can be folded from a state where it stands upright at a substantially right angle to the game board 1A to a state parallel to the game board 1A. Specifically, the vertical base 101A of the modified example is rotated by a base member 101Aa that stands upright at a substantially right angle to the game board 1A, and a hinge 101B that serves as a rotation axis that extends parallel to the game area 1p of the game board 1A. The rotating member 101Ab is freely connected to the base member 101Aa and has the game board relay board 101 attached thereto. Further, in the vertical base 101A of the modified example, at the joint surface between the base member 101Aa and the rotating member 101Ab, a protrusion 101a is formed on one of the base member 101Aa and the rotating member 101Ab, and a protrusion 101a is formed on the other side. A boss hole 101b is formed into which a can be inserted. The rotating member 101Ab is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 1A, and the protrusion 101a is inserted into the boss hole 101b, so that the game board relay board 101 is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 1A. fixed in the state. Furthermore, by rotating the rotating member 101Ab around the hinge 101B from this state, the protrusion 101a is pulled out from the boss hole 101b, and the game board relay board 101 is brought into a state parallel to the game board 1A. folded into.

[Mounting base]
47 is a perspective view of the mounting base 420, FIG. 48 is a front view of the mounting base 420, and FIG. 49 is a sectional view of the main unit 400. The mounting base 420 is attached with a projector unit b and a mirror member b3 as a game device capable of executing control related to the game. The mounting base 420 includes a gaming device mounting portion 421 to which the projector unit b is mounted, a projection light hole 422 formed under the gaming device mounting portion 421 through which the projection light emitted from the projector unit b can pass, and a projection light hole 422 through which the projection light emitted from the projector unit b can pass. It has a mirror member base 423 which is disposed below the light hole 422 and to which the mirror member b3 is attached, and a board hole 424 through which the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 46) of the game board 1A is inserted. The mounting base 420 has two structures consisting of a gaming device mounting section 421, a projection light hole 422, and a mirror member base 423, and these structures are arranged in the vertical direction. The above configuration projects the projection light emitted from the projector unit b onto the back surface of the screen portion b4. Furthermore, the configuration below projects the projection light emitted from the projector unit b onto the back surface of the game board 1A. The board hole 424 is arranged on the back side of the game board relay board 101 when the mounting base 420 is attached to the mounting frame 410 to which the game board 1A is attached, and the board hole 424 is arranged on the back side of the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 46). This is a hole to be inserted.

The game device mounting portion 421 is a plate-shaped body that slopes downward from the back side to the front side, and the projector unit b is attached to the back side so as to irradiate projection light diagonally downward on the front side. The projection light hole 422 is a hole formed in a range that does not block the projection light emitted from the projector unit b. The mirror member base 423 is a plate-shaped body that slopes downward from the back side to the front side. Further, the mirror member base 423 is formed in a range necessary to reflect the projection light emitted from the projector unit b. Specifically, since the mirror member base 423 is sloped downward from the back side toward the front side, the distance from the projector unit b attached above increases from the back side to the front side. Therefore, the width of the range necessary to reflect the projection light emitted from the projector unit b is narrower on the back side than on the front side. That is, the range necessary for reflecting the projection light emitted from the projector unit b on the mirror member base 423 has a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the back side is narrower than the width of the front side when viewed from above. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48, the mirror member base 423 is formed into a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the back side is narrower than the width of the front side when viewed from above.

Further, the mirror member b3 attached to the upper surface of the mirror member base 423 is also formed into a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the back side is narrower than the width of the front side when viewed from above. Moreover, since the mirror member base 423 is inclined downward from the back side to the front side, as shown in FIG. 48, the width of the upper side of the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 is It is formed into a trapezoid shape that is narrower than the width of the lower side. Further, the mirror member b3 is attached to the mirror member base 423 by adjustment members 423a provided near the four corners of the trapezoidal shape. The adjustment member 423a includes, for example, a fastening member that fastens the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3, and an elastic member disposed between the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3, and is configured to loosen the fastening member. The mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 are separated from each other, and the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 are brought close to each other by tightening the fastening member. By adjusting the attachment angle of the mirror member b3 to the mirror member base 423 using such an adjustment member 423a, the position and angle at which the projection light emitted from the projector unit b is projected onto the screen portion b4 or the game board 1A can be adjusted. can be adjusted.

By attaching the projector unit b to such a game device mounting portion 421, one end side of the projector cover b1 provided with a projection lens b2a that emits projection light from a projector device main body b2, which will be described later, can be attached to a pachinko game machine. It is possible to arrange the opposite end of one end on the front side of Y (see FIG. 42) on the back side, and to make one end lower than the opposite end. Become. Then, the projector unit b is covered with a cover member 430. Thereby, a predetermined space 405 is formed between the cover member 430, the lower part of the projector cover b1, and the cover member 430 at a position that does not block the projection light emitted from the projection lens b2a, and this predetermined space 405 A recess 431a of a cover member 430, which will be described later, is arranged in the recess 431a, and the main control board 70A can be housed in the recess 431a.

Note that the mounting base 420 may be formed in a shape to which not only the projector unit b but also other gaming devices such as a liquid crystal display device can be mounted. In other words, the shape of the mounting base 420 can be changed depending on the type of gaming machine within a range that can be accommodated within the space formed between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430.

[Projector unit]
As shown in FIG. 49, the projector unit b includes a projector main body b2 as a projection image generation device capable of generating projection light, a projector cover b1 as a housing case capable of accommodating the projector main body b2, and a projector main body b2. It includes a projection lens b2a as an irradiation unit that emits the projection light from b2. The projector device main body b2 is connected to a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 84), and the sub-control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit 90 (see FIG. 84) to project light from an optical mechanism (not shown). The irradiated light is magnified and emitted by a lens b2a, reflected by a mirror member b3, and projected toward the back of the game board 1A and screen part b4, thereby displaying an image as a visual performance. Such a screen portion b4 functions as an example of a reflecting portion that can reflect projection light emitted from the projector unit b. Further, the screen portion b4 functions as an example of a screen portion that projects a predetermined image using projection light reflected by the mirror member b3. Furthermore, a portion of the cover member 430 is formed in a concave shape at a position corresponding to the space 405 described above, and the main board 70A can be accommodated within the concave portion.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating the optical axis of projection light emitted from projector unit b. As shown in FIG. 50, the projection light L1 from the projection lens b2a of the projector unit b provided at the top is emitted downward while forming a projection range as shown by the dotted line. , is reflected diagonally upward on the front side by the upper mirror member b3 and is projected onto the back side of the screen part b4. The projection lens b2a of this embodiment is composed of a lens member, and the upper half side (front side) of the lens member is shielded from light, and the light is emitted from the lower half side (back side) of the lens member. A projected image is generated using projection light. Therefore, the projection light emitted from the projection lens b2a is formed to spread from the lower half side of the lens member. Similarly, the projection light L2 from the projection lens b2a of the projector unit b provided at the bottom is emitted downward while forming a projection range as shown by the dotted line, and is reflected by the mirror member b3 at the bottom to the front side. The light is reflected diagonally upward and projected onto the back side of the game board 1A.
In this way, by arranging the projector unit b or the Mirai member b3 at a certain installation angle and accommodating the projector unit b, the base case, etc. in the space created behind them, it is possible to arrange multiple game machines. Other gaming machine components can be arranged efficiently and space can be saved.

[Cover member]
51 is a perspective view of the cover member 430 seen from the back side, and FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the cover member 430 seen from the front side. As shown in FIG. 51, the cover member 430 is formed from a back surface 431 and two side surfaces 432 facing each other, and has a gaming machine structure inside a space formed between it and the mounting base 420 (see FIG. 49). At least a portion of the component can be accommodated therein. Moreover, the cover member 430 is provided on the back side of the game board by being provided on the rearmost side, and functions as an example of a cover member that covers electrical components.

As shown in FIG. 51, the width of the back portion 431 is narrower than the width of the mounting base 420. The back section 431 includes a recess 431a that can accommodate the main control board 70A, a lid 431b that covers the recess 431a, and an opening 431c formed at a position corresponding to the waste heat port of the projector unit b (see FIG. 49). , and a payout control board accommodating section 431d that can accommodate the payout control board 123A. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the back surface portion 431 is formed with a second guide gutter opening 432f in which a receiving portion 434a (see FIG. 56) of a second guide gutter 434 (described later) is arranged. As shown in FIG. 49, the recess 431a and the payout control board accommodating part 431d are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 to the inside of the pachinko gaming machine Y, and the main control board 70A and the payout control board 123A are connected to the cover member 430. It can be housed so that it does not protrude from the surface of 430 toward the back side of the pachinko game machine Y. The recess 431a is arranged in a predetermined space 405 formed at the lower part of the projector cover b1 with the cover member 430 attached to the back side of the mounting base 420 (see FIG. 49), and the main control board 70A is accommodated in the recess 431a. , covered with a lid portion 431b. The main control board 70A includes, for example, a main control board connector connection part 70Aa which is an example of a general component connector connection part connected to the relay board 100 (see FIG. 51) by a wiring member (cable). The main control board connector connection part 70Aa is provided near the side edge of the main control board 70A, and even when the lid part 431b is attached to the recessed part 431a, it is not covered by the lid part 431b and is exposed. ) can be attached and detached. Thereby, the surface of the back portion 431 becomes substantially flush. In this way, the cover member 430 can house the main control board 70A, which is an example of the first gaming machine component, inside the space formed by the back surface portion 431 and at least two side surfaces 432. Furthermore, the openings 431c are formed at positions corresponding to the waste heat ports of the two projector units b, respectively. The payout control board accommodating portion 431d is attached to the back side of the mounting base 420 and is arranged in a space formed in the lower part of the lower mirror member base 423. Further, the recessed portion 431a is arranged closer to the center of the cover member 430 than the arrangement position of a ball passage unit 730 (see FIG. 58), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 51, the widths of the mutually opposing side surfaces 432 become narrower from the front side to the back side. The side surface 432 includes a mounting portion 433 that can be attached to the mounting base 420 on an end side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion 431, and at least one side surface 432 is adjacent to the back surface portion 431 from the end where the mounting portion 433 is provided. It is formed so as to be inclined towards the end. The inclined side surface 432 includes a first side recess 432a which is a specific storage section, a first side cover 432b that covers the first side recess 432a, a second side recess 432c which is a general storage section, and a second side recess 432a. 432c, and an opening 432e formed in the first side recess 432a. Further, the recess 431a and the second side recess 432c are an example of a general storage section composed of at least two storage sections, and are adjacent to the first side recess 432a, which is an example of a specific storage section.

The first side recess 432a is provided on the outer surface of the cover member 430, and is formed in a position adjacent to the recess 431a of the back surface 431 and the payout control board accommodating section 431d. A relay board 100 as a component can be accommodated therein. The second side recess 432c is provided on the outer surface of the cover member 430 at a position adjacent to the first side recess 432a, and is connected to the sub-control board 80A (sub-control board 33) as a component of a plurality of other gaming machines. (equivalent to) can be accommodated. The first side recess 432a and the second side recess 432c are formed to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 to the inside of the pachinko gaming machine Y, and are designed to prevent the relay board 100 and the sub-control board 80A from playing the pachinko game from the surface of the cover member 430. It can be stored so that it does not protrude to the back side of machine Y. The relay board 100 is connected to, for example, a main control board 70A (corresponding to the main control board 28), a sub-control board 80A, a game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 45), etc. by a specific component connector using a wiring member (cable). The relay board connector connection part 100a is an example of the relay board connector connection part 100a. The sub-control board 80A includes a sub-control board connector connection part 80Aa, which is an example of a general component connector connection part that is connected to the relay board 100 or the like by a wiring member (cable), for example. That is, the relay board connector connection portion 100a and the main control board connector connection portion 70Aa and the sub control board connector connection portion 80Aa are connected by wiring members (cables). The opening 432e is provided with wiring from the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 45) of the game board 1A housed inside the space formed by the back surface 431 and the two side surfaces 432 on the outside of the cover member 430. It is provided so as to be connectable to the relay board 100 which is installed, and is formed at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101 that stands up from the back side of the game board 1A with the cover member 430 attached to the mounting frame 410. ing. The first side recess 432a in which such an opening 432e is formed is provided on the outer surface of the side surface, and is a part of a specific accommodating part capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component connected to the wiring through the opening. Serves as an example. Further, the second side recess 432c is formed on the outer inclined side surface of the cover member so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member toward the inside of the gaming machine, and is a second recessed portion 432c that is different from the first gaming machine component. This is an example of a housing part that can house gaming machine components. Thereby, from the opening 432e, the game board relay board 101 can be connected to the main body accommodated in the recess 431a adjacent to the side first recess 432a via the connector connected to the connector connection part 101a of the game board relay board 101. It becomes possible to electrically connect the control board 70A. In this way, the first side recess 432a in which the relay board 100 can be accommodated is located at the center of the recess in which other boards can be accommodated.

FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the game board relay board 101, the board hole 424 of the mounting base 420, and the opening 432e of the cover member 430. FIG. 53 is an enlarged perspective view of the part where the game board relay board 101 is attached, in which (a) shows the mounting base 420 attached to the back side of the mounting frame 410, and (b) shows the state where the mounting base 420 is further attached. A cover member 430 is shown attached to the back side of the base 420. As shown in FIG. 53(a), when the mounting base 420 is attached to the mounting frame 410 to which the game board 1A (see FIG. 43) is attached, the connector connecting portion 101a of the game board relay board 101 is connected to the mounting frame 410. 420 protrudes from the board hole 424 to the back side. 53(b), by further attaching the cover member 430 to the back side of the mounting base 420 from the state shown in FIG. 53(a), the side surface of the game board relay board 101 is attached to the cover member 430. covered. In this state, the wiring insertion port 101b of the connector connection portion 101a faces toward the opening 432e of the cover member 430. In FIG. 53, the entire game board relay board 101 is covered by the cover member 430 and the second side lid part 432d, but only a portion of the game board relay board 101 may be covered. Alternatively, only one surface such as the outer surface or the inner surface of the game board relay board 101 may be covered. In any case, the effects of the present invention can be achieved if at least part of the external force applied to the game board relay board 101 can be prevented. In this case, it is desirable to provide the connector connection portion 101a in a portion that is not covered by the cover member 430 (for example, if the outer surface of the game board relay board 101 is covered with the cover member 430, the connector connection portion 101a is (e.g., providing a connector connection portion 101a on the inner surface of the

Further, as shown in FIG. 53(a), the mounting base 420 is screwed to the fixing portion 411a on the back surface of the mounting frame 410 using a fixing member 425 made of screws or the like. After that, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the cover member 430 is placed on the back side of the mounting base 420, covers the fixing member 425 with the mounting part 433, and fixes the fixing member 430, which is made of screws etc. that penetrate the mounting base 420. The member 435 is screwed to the fixing portion 411a on the back side of the mounting frame 410. Therefore, the screws on the mounting base 420 cannot be removed until after the screws on the cover member 430 have been removed.

FIG. 54 is a top view of the pachinko gaming machine Y. FIG. 54 shows a state in which the main body unit 400 is opened from the main body frame 2 (a state in which the main body unit 400 is rotated 90 degrees around the main body frame hinge 2b from a state in which the main body unit 400 is placed inside the main body frame 2). There is. The cover member 430 has a side surface 432 on the opposite side to the side pivoted on the main body frame hinge 2b located inside an imaginary circle VC that passes through the inner side edge of the main body frame 2 and is centered on the main body frame hinge 2b as a rotation axis. At least a portion thereof is formed in a shape along an imaginary circle.

[Gutter connection part]
FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the main body unit 400, and FIGS. 56 and 57 are exploded perspective views of the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434. 56 and 57 are diagrams showing only the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a view seen from the mounting frame 410, and FIG. 57 is a view seen from the cover member 430. As shown in FIG. 55, the mounting frame 410 includes a storage tank 415 that can store game balls supplied from a storage unit (not shown), and a first guide gutter 416 that guides the game balls downstream from the storage tank 415. have The cover member 430 includes a payout device 700 that can pay out game balls, and a second guide gutter 434 that guides the game balls to the payout device 700.

The first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 are connected so that one opening is inserted into the other opening when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state. One of the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 (the second guide gutter 434 in the example shown in FIGS. 56 and 57) is connected to the other (the first guide gutter 416 in the example shown in FIGS. 56 and 57). ) is provided with a receiving portion 434a having an opening area wider than the opening area of the opening. The receiving part 434a has a rib 434b as a connection position guide means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving part 434a to the connection position. The ribs 434b are plate-shaped bodies that extend in a radial direction centered on the opening, and have side edges that are sloped downward from the outer edge to the inner edge of the receiving portion 434a, and are arranged in plurality so as to surround the opening. . The other of the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 (first guide gutter 416 in the example shown in FIGS. 56 and 57) has a shape of a portion provided at the outer edge of the opening and surrounded by ribs 434b. It has an engaging portion 416a as an engaging means that engages with the rib 434b at the connection position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43, the mounting frame 410 has a third guide gutter 418 that guides the game balls to the payout port 901 (see FIG. 41) of the tray unit 900. Further, the cover member 430 has a fourth guide gutter (see FIG. 59) as a fourth guide gutter that guides game balls downstream from the payout device 700, which will be described later.

The third guideway 418, the first guideway 730C, and the second guideway 730D (see FIG. 60) are arranged so that when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, one opening is inserted into the other opening. By being connected to, the game ball becomes in a state where it can flow down. A receiving portion 418a is provided in the third guide gutter 418 and one of the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D (in the example shown in FIG. 43, the third guide gutter 418). The receiving portion 418a has a plurality of ribs similarly to the receiving portion 434a. The discharge ports 730B (see FIG. 59) of the first guideway 730C and the second guideway 730D have engaging portions that engage with a plurality of ribs of the receiving portion 418a, similarly to the first guideway 416.

[Dispensing device]
FIG. 58 is an overall perspective view showing the dispensing device 700, and FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing a ball passage unit 730 included in the dispensing device 700. The dispensing device 700 includes a ball supply path 710, a ball delivery mechanism 720, and a ball passage unit 730. The ball supply path 710 is a piping component that guides game balls from the storage tank 415 (see FIG. 55) provided at the top to the ball delivery mechanism 720. The ball delivery mechanism 720 counts the number of prize balls corresponding to winnings and delivers game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls. The ball passage unit 730 is arranged at the end of the back side of the cover member 430 (see FIG. 55), and is for guiding the game balls fed out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 to the payout port 901 of the tray unit 900, which will be described later. be.

The ball supply path 710 transports one game ball from the storage tank 415 (see FIG. 55) to the ball delivery mechanism 720 via a first guide gutter 416 and a second guide gutter 434 (see FIG. 57) which are connected to each other. It is installed vertically so that it can flow down naturally. A lower end outlet (not shown) of the ball supply path 710 is connected to an upper inlet (not shown) of the ball delivery mechanism 720.

The ball delivery mechanism 720 is configured to be able to guide the game balls flowing down from the ball supply path 710 into the interior from an upper entrance (not shown) and pay them out one by one from a lower exit (not shown). The ball sending mechanism 720 has an internal mechanism capable of feeding out game balls one by one, a solenoid for operating the internal mechanism, and a count sensor (not shown) for counting the game balls that have been fed out. The ball sending mechanism 720 deactivates the internal mechanism and solenoid so as not to send out game balls when there is no winning, but when there is a winning, the internal mechanism and solenoid are kept inactive until the number of game balls corresponding to the winning is delivered. The game balls are counted by a count sensor while the mechanism and the solenoid are activated, and when game balls equal to the number of prize balls are fed out, the internal mechanism and the solenoid are again deactivated. Thereby, the ball sending mechanism 720 can pay out game balls one by one as many as the number of prize balls when winning a prize. The lower outlet of the ball delivery mechanism 720 is connected to the introduction port 730A provided at the upper part of the ball passage unit 730, and the game balls paid out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 are introduced one by one into the introduction port 730A of the ball passage unit 730. Flow down. The game balls fed out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 are basically guided to the introduction port 730A, but may be guided to the below-described ball extraction port 730a adjacent to the introduction port 730A.

The ball passage unit 730 has a guide path through which a large number of game balls fed out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 can be arranged in a rosy pattern and pass through. It is configured to guide a game ball. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit 730, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit 730 in a different orientation from that in FIG. The ball passage unit 730 includes a passage partition member 731, a full tank detection lever 732, a full tank detection sensor 733, a first cover member 734, a second cover member 735, and a ball removal member 736. As a guideway for the ball passage unit 730, a first guideway 730C is formed between the left side of the passage partition member 731 and the first cover member 734 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine Y. A second guide path 730D is formed between the right side of the passage partition member 731 and the second cover member 735 when viewed from the front side. The first guideway 730C and the second guideway 730D each have a sufficient path length to allow a large number of game balls to be lined up.

On the left side of the passage partition member 731, a roadside wall of the first guiding passage 730C is formed so as to meander back and forth from the upper inlet 730A to the lower outlet 730B. The roadside wall formed on the left side of the passage partition member 731 forms the right half of the first guideway 730C in the shape of a groove (see FIG. 61). A roadside wall of a second guideway 730D is formed on the right side of the passage partition member 731 so as to extend from the upper inlet 730A to the lower outlet 730B. The roadside wall formed on the right side of the passage partition member 731 forms the left half of the second guideway 730D in the shape of a groove (see FIG. 60). The second guideway 730D is adjacent to the first guideway 730C with a partition wall in between. That is, the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D are arranged side by side so as to guide the game balls in the same direction.

On the other hand, the opposite surface of the first cover member 734 facing the left side of the passage partition member 731 is also formed so that the roadside wall of the first guideway 730C meanders back and forth and extends from the inlet 730A to the outlet 730B. has been done. The left side of the passage partition member 731 and the roadside wall on the opposing surface of the first cover member 734 are brought together to form a first guiding path 730C, as well as an inlet 730A and an outlet 730B. Furthermore, a roadside wall of the second guiding path 730D is also formed on the opposing surface of the second cover member 735 that faces the right side of the passage partition member 731 so as to extend toward the discharge port 730B. The right side of the passage partition member 731 and the roadside wall on the opposing surface of the second cover member 735 are brought together to form a second guideway 730D. The first guideway 730C is formed with a relatively large first width in the lateral direction, while the second guideway 730D is laterally smaller than the lateral width (first width) of the first guideway 730C. It is formed with a second width and merges with the first guiding path 730C on the upstream side of the discharge port 730B. Moreover, the discharge port 730B is formed to have a first width that is the same as the width (first width) of the first guiding path 730C in the lateral direction. In addition, the introduction port 730A is electrically connected only to the first guide path 730C, and basically the game ball fed out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 enters the introduction port 730A. However, in a portion adjacent to the introduction port 730A, a ball extraction port 730a communicating with the ball extraction member 736 is formed by fitting the right side of the passage partition member 731 and the second cover member 735. As a result, game balls that cannot enter the introduction port 730A because the first guide path 730C is clogged are guided to the ball extraction port 730a. The lower end of the second guideway 730D is formed to merge with the first guideway 730C near the discharge port 730B. As a result, when the clogging of game balls near the discharge port 730B is cleared, the game balls accumulated in the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D are collectively discharged from the discharge port 730B.

62 is a plan view showing the first guide path 730C of the ball path unit 730, and FIG. 63 is a plan view showing the second guide path 730D of the ball path unit 730. A through hole 731A is formed in the upper part of the passage partition member 731 for guiding the game ball from the right side to the left side. On the right side of the passage partition member 731, a branch passage 730E is formed in the upper part of the first guide passage 730C, which can guide the game ball to the through hole 731A. The opposite side of the through-hole 731A communicates with the upper end of the second guideway 730D. As a result, when the game balls in the first guide path 730C are clogged up to the top and cannot flow downward, the game balls flowing down from the introduction port 730A to the top of the first guide path 730C are transferred to the first guide path 730C. The game ball that has been guided to the branch path 730E by bypassing the branch path 730E, and further guided to the branch path 730E, is guided to the upper end of the second guide path 730D through the through hole 731A, and then to the first guide path 730C. Game balls to be paid out as prize balls are temporarily stored inside the ball passage unit 730 until not only the second guiding path 730D is filled with game balls.

In addition, on the right side of the passage partition member 731, there is a full tank detection lever 732 that can swing with its tip protruding in the middle of the second guideway 730D, and a tip of the full tank detection lever 732 protrudes. A full tank detection sensor 733 is provided to detect a state of displacement toward the back from the posture. The full tank detection lever 732 is provided in a substantially vertical portion of the second guiding path 730D, and when it comes into pressure contact with a game ball that is clogged up to this portion and cannot flow down, it will be in a state of being displaced to the back. The full tank detection sensor 733 detects that the second guiding path 730D is clogged with game balls and is full when the full tank detection lever 732 that has been displaced to the rear is in contact with the lever for a predetermined period of time, and responds accordingly. The signal is output to the payout/fire control circuit 123 (see FIG. 84). Thereby, even if the flow of game balls in the first guide path 730C is stagnant, the game ball feeding operation of the ball sending mechanism 720 can be continued until the second guide path 730D is full.

Further, a ball removing member 736 is attached to the right side of the second cover member 735 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine Y. The ball extracting member 736 discharges the game ball guided from the ball extracting port 730a from the lower end port 736A. The game balls discharged from the lower end opening 736A of the ball extraction member 736 are guided to a ball extraction conduit (not shown), and are finally discharged into a dollar box placed outside the pachinko game machine Y.

[Ball detection unit]
FIG. 64 is a perspective view showing the exit port 55 of the game board 1A, and FIG. 65 is a perspective view showing the ball detection unit 800 located behind the exit port 55 with the game board 1A removed. As shown in FIG. 64, an out port 55 is provided at the lower center of the game area 1p of the game board 1A to guide game balls that have flowed down without winning a prize to the back. As shown in FIG. 65, behind the out port 55, a plurality of game balls guided from the out port 55 are received, and the game balls are collected at a location facing the out port 55 and further back. An out ball receiving member 801 having an opening 801A for guiding the ball is provided. The ball detection unit 800 is provided in the mounting frame 410 immediately after the opening 801A of the out ball receiving member 801.

66 is a perspective view showing the entire ball detection unit 800, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball detection unit 800, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball detection unit 800 in a different direction from that in FIG. be. The ball detection unit 800 includes a left side component 810, a right side component 820, a protrusion member 830, a first detection sensor 840, and a second detection sensor 850. The ball detection unit 800 is for detecting a game ball that passes through the out port 55 as an inflow port and is discharged as an out ball. The left component 810 is provided with a first detection sensor 840, and the right component 820 is provided with a second detection sensor 850. The left side component 810 and the right side component 820 are joined with the projecting piece member 830 sandwiched in the center. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 function as an example of an inlet into which a plurality of game balls can flow, and a plurality of detection means capable of detecting the game balls that have flowed in downstream of the inflow port.

69 is an internal side view of the left component 810 that configures the ball detection unit 800, FIG. 70 is an internal side view of the right component 820 that configures the ball detection unit 800, and FIG. FIG. 8 is a top view of a projecting piece member 830. The left side component 810 and the right side component 820 are formed in a generally symmetrical shape, and each has a front opening 810A, 820A, an introduction space 810B, 820B, a sensor placement part 810C, 820C, and an idle space 810D, 820D. have

The front openings 810A and 820A are located directly behind the opening 801A of the out ball receiving member 801 and form a receiving port (inflow port) for receiving the game balls that have passed through the opening 801A. Each of the front openings 810A and 820A has an opening area that allows one game ball to pass through with plenty of room. Thereby, at least two game balls can enter the integrated receiving port at the same time.

The introduction spaces 810B and 820B are basically passages that lead game balls from the front openings 810A and 820A to the sensor placement parts 810C and 820C, respectively, and one game ball can pass through each with plenty of room. The bottom surfaces 810Ba and 820Ba of the introduction spaces 810B and 820B are slightly inclined from the horizontal plane, and are formed to descend as they move toward the back.

The sensor placement portions 810C and 820C are locations where the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are placed, respectively. In the sensor arrangement parts 810C and 820C, the front ends of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are arranged at a slightly lower level than the bottom surfaces 810Ba and 820Ba of the introduction spaces 810B and 820B. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are arranged in an inclined posture such that they become higher from the front end to the rear end. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are provided with a passage hole through which one game ball can pass, and when a game ball passes through this passage hole, it is detected as an out ball and is ejected downward. collected after Thereby, the game balls that have been guided from the introduction spaces 810B and 820B to the sensor placement sections 810C and 820C are easily guided to the passage holes of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850.

The floating spaces 810D and 820D are provided downstream from the outlet 55 and above the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C, and form narrower spaces than the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C. The play spaces 810D and 820D have a width that is large enough for approximately one game ball to freely move in a state where they are integrated with each other. The bottom surfaces 810Da, 820Da of the floating spaces 810D, 820D are slightly inclined from the horizontal plane, and are formed to rise (bulge) toward the back. The front ends of the bottom surfaces 810Da and 820Da are formed to be located higher than the rear ends of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850. As a result, one game ball may be guided beyond the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 to the play spaces 810D and 820D at the back, and the game ball may be guided to the play spaces 810D and 820D. Even if the game ball is placed on the ground, it is likely to fall to the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850. Note that the play spaces 810D and 820D may be large enough to allow two or more game balls to move together in a unified state.

The projecting piece member 830 is provided so as to separate the sensor placement parts 810C and 820C (first detection sensor 840 and second detection sensor 850), introduction spaces 810B and 820B, and free space parts 810D and 820D. As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the projecting piece member 830 extends from the bottom of the front openings 810A and 820A, which serve as inlet ports, so that at least a portion of the game balls that have flowed in can ride on them. It has an inclined upper end 830A that rises (bulges) as it advances from the bottom of the front openings 810A, 820A to the floating spaces 810D, 820D. The upper end 830A does not completely partition the introduction spaces 810B, 820B and the floating spaces 810D, 820D, but projects slightly upwards from the bottom surfaces 810Ba, 820Ba, 810Da, 820Da. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 is formed to wave from side to side along the direction of game ball entry, and has a peak-like shape so that it is easy to slip even if the game ball that flows in rides on it. is formed. As a result, the game balls in the sensor placement parts 810C and 820C tend to cross the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 in the left-right direction and fall onto either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850. In addition, the game ball that has advanced from the sensor placement parts 810C and 820C to the inner play spaces 810D and 820D comes into contact with the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830, and the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor It is swung down towards either sensor 850.

[Plate unit]
FIG. 72 is an overall perspective view showing the glass door 5 provided with the dish unit 900, and FIG. 73 is an overall front view showing the front of the glass door 5. A pan unit 900 is provided at the lower left side when facing the front of the glass door 5. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, only one tray unit 900 exists, but for example, an upper tray unit and a lower tray unit may be provided, and either one may be applied as the tray unit 900 of this embodiment. . The tray unit 900 stores game balls that are paid out in accordance with winnings, guides the stored game balls to the firing device 26 one after another, and also releases so-called dollar boxes (not shown) arranged below in response to the player's ball extraction operation. This allows the game ball to be ejected into the ball (omitted). A payout port 901 for paying out game balls is provided at the rear of the tray unit 900, and a plurality of game balls are paid out from the payout port 901 to the tray unit 900. Behind the payout port 901, a ball delivery receiving member 902 is provided for receiving game balls from the firing device 26 and sending them out to the payout port 901 (see FIG. 74).

74 is an enlarged perspective view showing the entire dish unit 900, FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit 900, FIG. 76 is a top view of the dish unit 900, and FIG. 77 is a saucer cover member 930 of the dish unit 900. It is a top view of the state where it has been removed. The tray unit 900 includes a decorative cover 910, a main body portion 920, a saucer cover member 930, a ball removal passage member 940, a lid opening/closing portion 950, and the like. The decorative cover 910 is attached to the front and side surfaces of the dish unit 900 so as to cover the ball extraction passage member 940 and the like disposed at the lower part of the main body part 920. As shown in FIG. 75, the main body part 920 includes an alignment part 920A that arranges a plurality of game balls in an orderly line to the firing device 26 inside the pachinko game machine Y, and a player's operation of the lid opening/closing part 950. , a first opening/closing lid 920B and a second opening/closing lid 953B are provided for guiding game balls to the ball extraction passage member 940. The tray cover member 930 is arranged at the upper part of the main body part 920, and first receives and stores the game balls paid out from the payout port 901, and also directs the stored game balls to the alignment part 920A below. It is something that guides. The tray cover member 930 includes a cover part 930A that covers the alignment part 920A of the main body part 920 from above, and an outer peripheral part that forms a peripheral wall with an interval that allows game balls to pass between the outer wall 930Aa of the cover part 930A. 930B, a rectifying part 930C formed between this outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral part 930B and guiding the game balls to the lower alignment part 920A, and a plurality of game balls paid out from the payout opening 901 to slide off. a slope portion 930D that can hold a plurality of game balls that have slipped down from the slope portion 930D, a storage portion 930E that can store a plurality of game balls that have slipped down and flow them to the rectification portion 930C; A first opening 930F is provided above the opening/closing lid 920B. Note that in FIG. 74, illustration of the payout port 901 is omitted. In FIG. 75, illustration of the decorative cover 910 is omitted.

The alignment portion 920A of the main body portion 920 is provided so as to extend straight from side to side at a right-hand side opposite to the side where the dispensing port 901 (ball delivery receiving member 902) is arranged on the rear end side of the tray unit 900. The alignment portion 920A is formed in the shape of a linear groove by the guide piece 920Aa, slanting downward from the right side to the left side so that a plurality of game balls flow in a line. That is, the upstream side in the direction in which the game balls are aligned in the alignment section 920A (the upstream side in the alignment direction) corresponds to the right end of the alignment section 920A that is spaced from the payout port 901, and the cover section 930A is located at the right end of the alignment section 920A. Game balls flow down from the rectifying section 930C. An introduction port 920Ab for guiding game balls to the internal firing device 26 is provided at the left end of the alignment section 920A on the downstream side of the alignment, and an inlet 920Ab is provided on the bottom surface of the alignment section 920A above the second opening/closing lid 953B. A second opening 930G is provided. The game balls lined up in the alignment section 920A are linearly guided one by one to the introduction port 920Ab. The right end portion of the alignment portion 920A is partially exposed, and the remaining portion is covered by the cover portion 930A of the saucer cover member 930. Further, the portion of the main body portion 920 where the saucer cover member 930 is arranged is formed in a shape that generally matches the outer peripheral portion 930B, the rectifying portion 930C, the slope portion 930D, the storage portion 930E, and the first opening portion 930F of the saucer cover member 930. has been done. In addition, a wall portion 920Ac is provided on the rectifying portion 930C side of the alignment portion 920A to prevent game balls flowing down from riding on the game balls aligned in the alignment portion 920A even if the cover portion 930A is not attached. It is being When the first opening/closing lid 920B of the main body section 920 is opened by the player's operation of the first lid opening/closing section 950A, the game ball in the storage section 930E of the saucer cover member 930 moves downward through the first opening 930F. It is discharged. The ejected game balls are guided through the ball removal passage member 940 to a drop port 940A located directly above the dollar box, and the game balls are ejected from the drop port 940A to the dollar box. On the other hand, when the first opening/closing lid 920B is in the closed state, the game balls in the storage section 930E do not fall from the first opening 930F and remain as they are, and are guided to the rectifying section 930C. Furthermore, when the second opening/closing lid 953B of the main body section 920 is opened by the player's operation of the second lid opening/closing section 950B, the game balls lined up in the alignment section 920A are discharged downward through the second opening section 930G. Ru. The ejected game balls are guided through the ball removal passage member 940 to a drop port 940A located directly above the dollar box, and the game balls are ejected from the drop port 940A to the dollar box. On the other hand, when the second opening/closing lid 953B is in the closed state, the game balls lined up in the alignment part 920A are guided from the introduction port 920Ab to the internal firing device 26 without falling from the second opening 930G.

The cover portion 930A of the tray cover member 930 is located on the right side of the rear end side of the tray unit 900 on the opposite side to the side where the payout port 901 (ball delivery receiving member 902) is arranged. The outer wall 930Aa of the cover portion 930A is formed in a curved shape, and an opening 930Ab is formed in a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the alignment portion 920A. Further, the outer peripheral portion 930B is formed in a curved shape generally along the outer wall 930Aa so as to form a rectifying portion 930C between the outer peripheral portion 930B and the outer wall 930Aa. Thereby, the rectifying section 930C is formed as a passageway that guides the game balls in the storage section 930E toward the opening 930Ab while bending them in a curved shape. In addition, the outer wall portion 930Ea of the storage portion 930E and the outer peripheral portion 930B of the rectifying portion 930C form one continuous surface so that the game balls released from the payout port 901 can roll while contacting each other and reach the rectifying portion 930C. is forming. As a result, when no game balls are stored in the storage section 930E, the released game balls roll up to the outer wall section 930Ea, and are rectified while being changed in direction on the continuous surface (outer wall section 930Ea, outer peripheral section 930B). 930C. Here, a first opening 930F that can discharge game balls to the outside of the storage section 930E and a first opening/closing lid that can be switched between a closed state that can store game balls and an open state that can discharge game balls to the outside. 920B is provided at a predetermined distance from the continuous surface on the inside side of the storage section 930E (on the game board 1A side) so that the game ball can roll while contacting the continuous surface (outer wall portion 930Ea, outer peripheral portion 930B). It is provided. It is desirable that this predetermined interval be at least a distance equal to or longer than the diameter of the game ball. This is to prevent all the game balls released from the payout port 901 from being discharged to the outside from the first opening 930F. For example, if there are few game balls stored, the payout port 901 The game ball released from the ball rolls while contacting the continuous surface (outer wall portion 930Ea, outer circumferential portion 930B), does not reach the first opening 930F, and does not fall from the first opening 930F to the rectifying portion 930C. Therefore, even if the first opening/closing lid 920B is in the open state, most of the game balls will fall from the first opening 930F and the supply of game balls to the firing device 26 will be interrupted. Never.

The rectifying section 930C is formed so as to be inclined slightly downward from the storage section 930E toward the opening 930Ab. Further, the rectifying portion 930C is formed by the outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral portion 930B so that the width gradually becomes narrower as it advances toward the opening 930Ab. As a result, the game balls piled up randomly in the storage section 930E flow into the opening 930Ab in a gradually curved line by the rectifying section 930C. Moreover, even if some game balls reach the rectifying part 930C by being forcefully paid out from the payout port 901 and reach the rectifying part 930C over the slope part 930D and the storage part 930E, the game balls will not hit the inner surface of the curved outer peripheral part 930B. It is guided to the opening 930Ab via the rectifier 930C while the propulsive force is weakened.

78 is a perspective view of the main body portion 920, the ball removal passage member 940, and the lid opening/closing portion 950 viewed from the back side, and FIG. 79 is an exploded view of the view shown in FIG. 78. A lid opening/closing section 950 is provided below the main body section 920, and a ball removal passage member 940 is provided below the lid opening/closing section 950.

80 is a perspective view of the ball removal passage member 940, FIG. 81 is a sectional view taken along line AA' in FIG. 80, and FIG. 82 is a sectional view taken along line BB' in FIG. As shown in FIG. 80, the ball extraction passage member 940 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the top, extends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front side, is formed into a hollow shape, and has a first hole through which the game ball flows down. The passage 941 is connected to the downstream end of the first passage 941, extends in a direction perpendicular to the first passage 941 (front and back direction), and is formed in a hollow shape, through which the game ball flows down and the downstream end. A second passage 942 is provided with a drop opening 940A that is open at the bottom. The first passage 941 and the second passage 942 are arranged so that the bottom surfaces are inclined downward from the upstream side to the downstream side, so that the game balls flow down the inside from the upstream side to the downstream side.

The first passage 941 includes a first socket 941a and a second socket 941b for guiding game balls into the ball extraction passage member 940. The first receptacle 941a is formed at the upstream end under the first opening 930F (see FIG. 79) of the main body portion 920 and the first opening/closing lid 953A (see FIG. 79) of the first lid opening/closing portion 950A, The top is open. The first socket 941a protrudes from the side surface of the first passage 941, is curved, and is open at the top. Thereby, the game balls that have fallen from the first opening 930F can be smoothly guided into the first passage 941. The second receptacle 941b is located between the upstream end and the downstream end of the second opening 930G of the main body 920 (see FIG. 79) and the second opening/closing lid 953B of the second lid opening/closing section 950B (see FIG. 79). (see) and is open at the top. The second socket 941b protrudes from the side surface of the first passage 941, is curved, and is open at the top. Thereby, the game ball that has fallen from the second opening 930G can be smoothly guided into the first passage 941.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81, at least one of the two side surfaces of the first passage 941 extending in the upstream and downstream directions forms an inclined wall 941c that slopes downward toward the bottom surface. Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the inclined wall 941c protrudes from the middle toward the downstream end toward the other side surface. That is, the inclined wall 941c protrudes toward the other side while being inclined downward toward the bottom surface. As a result, the width inside the first passage 941 gradually narrows from the middle toward the downstream end and toward the bottom (for example, from the width of two game balls to the width of one game ball). ). Thereby, for example, even if a large amount of game balls flow into the first passage 941, the game balls can be rectified in one line and flowed down into the second passage 942. In addition, the first passage 941 is provided diagonally from the side surface on which the first receptacle 941a is provided to the other side surface in a portion facing the first receptacle 941a (see FIG. 80) on the side surface extending in the upstream and downstream direction. A guide wall 941d is formed that extends to. Thereby, the game balls flowing in from the first receptacle 941a can be smoothly guided into the first passage 941.

The second passage 942 includes a corner wall 942a forming an outer corner at a connecting portion of the first passage 941. The corner wall 942a is a portion that continues from the downstream end of the first passage 941 to the upstream end of the second passage 942, and is formed in a curved shape that bulges in the direction in which the game ball flows down.

FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the ball removal passage member 940. The ball removal passage member 940 is formed into a hollow shape through which a game ball can flow down by combining the first member 940a and the second member 940b. The first member 940a constitutes a top surface, a bottom surface, and one side surface of the first passage 941, and a top surface and two side surfaces of the second passage 942. The second member 940b constitutes the other side surface of the first passage 941, and the corner wall 942a and bottom surface of the second passage 942. In the first member 940a, recesses 940a' are formed diagonally upward from the lower ends of the parts constituting the two side surfaces of the second passage 942. In the second member 940b, protrusions 940b' that protrude diagonally upward are formed on two side edges of a portion constituting the bottom surface of the second passage 942, respectively. The notch 940a' and the protrusion 940b' are engaged with each other when the first member 940a and the second member 940b are combined with each other, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 82. Therefore, the two members can be maintained in a combined state without screwing the first member 940a and the second member 940b.

As shown in FIG. 79, the lid opening/closing part 950 includes a first lid opening/closing part 950A for opening/closing the first opening 930F of the main body 920, and a first lid opening/closing part 950A for opening/closing the second opening 930G of the main body 920. 2 lid opening/closing part 950B. The first lid opening/closing part 950A extends from the base end disposed below the main body part 920 toward the front side, has a tip protruding from the main body part 920 in the front direction, and includes a first grip part 951A that can be operated by the player. a first lid opening/closing part main body 952A that slidably holds the base end side of the first gripping part 951A; The first opening/closing lid 953A is movable between a closed state that closes the opening 930F and an open state that opens the first opening 930F. Thereby, by sliding the first gripping part 951A, the player can displace the first opening/closing lid 953A between the open state and the open state, and open/close the first opening 930F. The second lid opening/closing part 950B extends from the base end disposed below the main body part 920 toward the front side, has a tip protruding from the main body part 920 in the front direction, and includes a second grip part 951B that can be operated by the player. A second lid opening/closing part main body 952B that slidably holds the base end side of the second gripping part 951B, a closed state that is slidably attached to the second lid opening/closing part main body 952B and closes the second opening 930G; A second opening/closing lid 953B that can be moved to an open state that opens the opening 930G is connected to a second gripping part 951B and a second opening/closing lid 953B, and the second opening/closing lid 953B is connected to the second opening/closing lid 953B by sliding movement of the second gripping part 951B. A link portion 954 that displaces 953B between an open state and an open state is provided. Thereby, by sliding the second gripping part 951B, the player can displace the second opening/closing lid 953B between the open state and the open state, and open/close the second opening 930G.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machine according to second embodiment]
FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of a gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine Y according to the second embodiment is that a first detection sensor 840 and a second detection sensor 850 are connected to the main control circuit 70, and that a payout/fire control circuit 123 detects full capacity. This differs from the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment in that a sensor 733 is connected and that two projector device bodies b2 are connected to the sub-control circuit 200.

The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 each detect a game ball that has passed through the out port 55 (see FIG. 64) as an out ball, and output a predetermined output signal to the main control circuit 70. The full tank detection sensor 733 detects when the full tank detection lever 732 (see FIG. 63), which has been displaced toward the back, is in contact with the tank for a predetermined period of time, the second guiding path 730D (see FIG. 63) is clogged with game balls and the tank is full. This state is detected, and a predetermined output signal is output to the payout/emission control circuit 123. When the payout/launch control circuit 123 receives this predetermined output signal, it temporarily stops the payout of game balls by the prize ball case unit 170. In addition, when the full tank detection lever 732 is displaced to the front side and separated from the full tank detection sensor 733, the full tank detection sensor 733 detects that the second guiding path 730D is not clogged with game balls, A predetermined output signal is output to the payout/fire control circuit 123. When the payout/launch control circuit 123 receives this predetermined output signal, it restarts the payout of game balls by the prize ball case unit 170, which had been stopped once.

Similar to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the sub control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit 90 in accordance with the production operations of other game devices, etc., and controls the two projector device bodies b2 individually or in conjunction with each other. By projecting the irradiation light and projecting the irradiation light toward the back of the game board 1A and the screen part b4, an image is displayed as a visual performance.

Furthermore, gaming machine components such as various sensors, various devices, and other circuits connected to the main control circuit 70 are connected to the relay board 100 (see FIG. 51) housed in the cover member 430 (see FIG. 51), , is connected to the main control circuit 70 via the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 45) of the game board 1A (see FIG. 45).

In the pachinko game machine in the above embodiment, the game balls stored in the storage tray are fired onto the game board, and when a winning occurs, the game balls are paid out from the payout device to the storage tray. It is not limited to.

For example, a player inserts game media such as game balls and medals necessary for a game, plays a game based on the game media, and receives benefits based on the result of the game, such as a pachi-slot machine or a casino machine. The present invention can be applied to all of them. In other words, not only is the game medium used by the player's physical actions and the game medium is paid out according to the game result, but also the main control circuit (main control board) itself controls the game medium owned by the player. It may be possible to manage the game media electromagnetically and allow the player to play the game without touching the game medium. Furthermore, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media owned by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit (main control board) and manages the game media. Further, in that case, it is desirable that the game ball shot onto the game board be an enclosed type game machine where the game ball cannot be touched by the player.

The gaming media management device is a device that is provided in the gaming machine and has a ROM and RWM (or RAM), and is connected to an external gaming media handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface to enable bidirectional communication. It is sufficient that the device is capable of electromagnetically recording the game media used for games generated by the lending operation of the game media or the operation of paying out the game media. Furthermore, the game media management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko machine 1 or 1A based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A possessed game media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this possessed game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and also allows the player to In addition to cases in which the player is directly operated, the device has the ability to prevent the number of recorded game media from being reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is installed between the device and the external game media handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of game media recorded except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal on the side of the game media handling device A plate may be provided (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, when you obtain a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game and end the game, by operating one of the return operation means, the game media management device sends the number of game media to the game media handling device. The game media handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player either takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, compared to the case where game media are physically used in games, it is possible to reduce the number of payout devices, etc. inside the game machine, and reduce the cost and manufacturing of the game machine. Not only can costs be reduced, it also prevents players from coming into direct contact with gaming media, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, as well as reducing the power consumption of gaming machines by reducing the number of devices. It will also reduce it. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

According to the pachinko game machine Y according to the second embodiment, the following effects are achieved. According to the pachinko game machine Y, since the projector unit b can be arranged in an inclined state at a position where it does not block the projection light emitted from the projection lens b2a from the front side to the back side, the front side of the projector unit b Therefore, the installation space in the rear side direction can be reduced. Furthermore, since the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the predetermined space 405 formed between the lower part of the projector unit b arranged in this manner and the cover member, the main control board 70A can be stored in another location without using the predetermined space 405. Compared to the case where the main control board 70A is provided, space can be saved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine whose back mechanism can save space.

Furthermore, one end of the projector unit b provided with the projection lens b2a is placed on the front side of the pachinko game machine Y, the opposite end is placed on the back side, and one end side is placed on the opposite end. By arranging the projector unit so that it is lower than the projector unit side, it is possible to release the waste heat from the projector unit b diagonally upward without being trapped in the back mechanism of the pachinko machine Y, and this waste heat can be transferred to other It is possible to prevent adverse effects on precision parts.

As a result, the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the recess 431a of the cover member 430, so while the main control board 70A is housed in the predetermined space 405 below the projector unit b, the waste heat of the projector unit b can be absorbed from the main control board 70A. This makes it possible to protect the main control board 70A and prevent the harmful effects of this waste heat on the main control board 70A. Further, by housing the main control board 70A in the cover member 430 disposed on the outside, maintenance of the component parts becomes easier.

Furthermore, since the projector unit b and the mirror member b3 can be attached to the mounting base 420 provided between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430, it is necessary to provide the mirror member b3 so as to protrude from the front of the mounting frame 410. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that can appropriately project irradiated light onto the screen without spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the pachinko game machine Y.

In addition, the width of the mounting base 420 is made narrower from the front side to the back side, so that the main board 70A can be accommodated in the back part 431 of the cover member 430, and the side surface 432 of the cover member 430 has a different width than the main board 70A. Since the relay board 100 can be accommodated, it is possible to effectively utilize the limited space inside the gaming machine. Further, the cover member 430 is formed to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 toward the inside of the pachinko game machine Y, and accommodates the main control board 70A so as not to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 toward the back side of the pachinko game machine Y. A possible recess 431a is provided. Thereby, by housing the main control board 70A in the recess 431a, the main control board 70A can be provided between the mounting base 420 and the surface of the cover member 430 so as not to protrude toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine Y. It becomes possible to effectively utilize the limited internal space.

In addition, since the game board 1A is removably fixed by the movable stopper attached to the mounting frame 410 arranged on the front side, and the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430 are attached to the back side of the mounting frame 410, the cover Unless the member 430 is removed, it is difficult to access the game board movable stopper 413 provided on the mounting frame 410, thereby preventing fraudulent activity. In addition, various parts provided on the back side of the game board 1A can be attached to the mounting base 420 and cover member 430 provided on the back side of the game board 1A, so for example, the game board can be installed without changing various parts. It is also possible to change only 1A, which facilitates the design of the gaming machine. In addition, when assembling the game machine, the game board movable stopper 413 related to the game board 1A is attached to the side surface of the mounting frame 410, and the cover member 430 in which the main control board 70A is housed is attached to the back surface of the mounting frame 410. In this way, the mounting surfaces are configured to be different for each large category of components, such as components related to the game board 1A and components related to the back mechanism such as the main control board 70A. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that facilitates design changes and assembly work of the game machine, and reduces the amount of work water used in the assembly work.

In addition, by separating which parts are attached to which side of the mounting frame 410 and assembling according to the arrangement of the parts to be attached to the mounting frame 410 (inner periphery or rear surface), it is possible to prevent errors in assembly work. .

Further, a mounting base 420 is provided between the mounting frame 410 and a cover member 430 that can accommodate the main control board 70A, a projector unit b is mounted on the mounting base 420, and a control board that can control the gaming machine is attached to the cover member. By installing a fixing portion 411a on the mounting frame 410 that can separately fix the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430, the shape of the mounting base 420 can be changed depending on the type of gaming device. . Therefore, by configuring the member that covers the back mechanism with two members, the cover member 430 and the mounting base 420, while using the cover member 430, which is a common member, the mounting base 420 can be used for the production of Pachinko gaming machine Y. By changing the shape to suit the type of gaming machine that matches its characteristics, it becomes possible to develop flexible models. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the versatility of the member that covers the back mechanism.

Furthermore, unless the cover member 430 is removed, the mounting base 420 to which the game device is attached cannot be operated, so it is possible to prevent the game device from being removed from the outside due to mischief or the like.

Furthermore, by attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the entire gaming machine. Further, by forming the member that covers the back mechanism into a double structure of the cover member 430 and the mounting base 420, it is possible to further improve the rigidity of the entire gaming machine.

According to the pachinko game machine Y, since at least one of the side surfaces 432 of the cover member 430 is inclined, the game mechanism such as the sub-control board 80A is Since the area in which components can be installed becomes larger, it becomes possible to install a wider variety of gaming machine component parts. Furthermore, in addition to the main control board 70A accommodated inside the space formed by the back surface section 431 and at least two side surfaces 432, the sub-control board 80A can be accommodated in the inclined side surface section 432. Compared to the case where the sub-control board 80A is integrated into the back part 431, it is possible to suppress the sub-control board 80A from protruding into the back part 431 of the pachinko game machine Y. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the depth dimension.

Furthermore, by providing the recess 431a in the back surface 431 of the cover member 430, the bending strength of the back surface 431 of the cover member 430 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the strength of the cover member that covers the back side of the gaming machine.

Further, for example, if the main control board 70A protrudes from the back surface portion 431, external force will be applied to this protruding portion when the pachinko gaming machine Y is moved, increasing the possibility that it will be damaged. According to the present invention, by accommodating the main control board 70A in the recess 431a and making the surface of the back portion 431 substantially flush with each other, external force is applied to the gaming machine components and damage them when the gaming machine is moved. This can reduce the possibility of

Furthermore, since at least one of the side surfaces 432 of the cover member 430 is sloped, the area in which gaming machine components such as the sub-control board 80A can be installed is larger than when the side surface 432 is not sloped when the depth dimension is the same. Since it becomes larger, it becomes possible to attach a wider variety of gaming machine component parts. Also, at least a part of the side surface portion 432 on the opposite side to the side pivoted on the main body frame 2 is placed inside a virtual circle VC centered on the main body frame hinge 2b of the main body unit 400 and passing through the inner side edge of the main body unit 400. Therefore, the space inside the cover member 430 can be made wider and more gaming machine components can be arranged within the range in which the cover member 430 can be rotated inside the main body frame 2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the depth dimension.

Moreover, since at least a part of the side surface portion 432 of the cover member 430 is formed in a shape along the virtual circle VC, the space inside the cover member 430 is further expanded within the range that allows rotation inside the main body frame 2. It becomes possible to arrange even more gaming machine components.

Furthermore, since at least one of the side surfaces 432 of the cover member 430 is sloped, the area in which gaming machine components such as the sub-control board 80A can be installed is larger compared to a case where the side surface portion 432 is not sloped when the depth dimension is the same. Since it becomes larger, it becomes possible to attach a wider variety of gaming machine component parts. In addition, in the cover member 430, the wiring from the game board relay board 101 of the game board 1A housed inside the space formed by the back surface portion 431 and at least two side surfaces 432 is connected to the opening portion 432e of the cover member 430. The relay board 100 is provided so as to be connectable to the relay board 100 provided on the outside, and the relay board 100 connected to the wiring via the opening 432e can be accommodated in the first side recess 432a. A recess 431a and a second side recess 432c that can respectively accommodate the control board 70A and the sub-control board 80A are arranged adjacent to each other. As a result, even if it is possible to install a more diverse variety of main control boards 70A, it is possible to arrange various gaming machine components in a concentrated manner, and it is possible to shorten the cables that connect them. Therefore, it becomes easier to check various gaming machine component parts and to route cables and the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can simplify the assembly work and maintenance of the gaming machine.

According to the pachinko game machine Y, if the payout port of the storage tray is blocked, the prize ball is won in the first guiding path 730C that leads from the ball delivery mechanism 720 to the discharge port 730B inside the payout device 700. Even if the flow of balls stagnates and a blockage occurs, the game balls from the ball delivery mechanism 720 are detoured to the second guide path 730D through the branch path 730E branching from the upper part of the first guide path 730C and the through hole 731A. Even if the second guiding path 730D is filled with game balls, when the blockage near the payout port (discharge port 730B) is resolved, the first guiding path 730C and the second guiding path 730D A large number of full game balls can be immediately discharged all at once from the discharge port 730B. That is, it is possible to prevent the game balls from clogging inside the payout device 700 by delaying it as much as possible until the second guiding path 730D is full.

In addition, since the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D are provided inside the payout device 700, there is no fear that the game ball in the guide path will be directly touched by the player's hand, and the game ball may be damaged by external factors. It is possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

In addition, in the cover member 430, the ball passage unit 730 and the board accommodating part can be formed as an integrated unit, and by arranging the control board from the center of the cover member 430, flexibility can be provided in wiring routing. This also makes it easier to confirm whether the control board is tampered with.

In addition, until the second guideway 730D is full and the full tank detection lever 732 and the full tank detection sensor 733 detect the stagnation of game balls, the ball sending mechanism 720 releases the game balls as prize balls according to winnings. Game balls can be continuously fed out. Therefore, even when the tank is full, the payout operation can be continued without being interrupted immediately, and more game balls can be stored inside the payout device 700. In addition, by changing the width of the first guideway 730C and the second guideway 730D in the lateral direction, it is possible to change the storage amount and flow rate of game balls in the first guideway and the second guideway, making it possible to It becomes possible to make adjustments so that an appropriate payout operation can be performed.

In addition, by being provided so as to overlap the first taxiway 730C in plan view, the second taxiway 730D can effectively secure space without greatly expanding the space occupied by the second taxiway 730D, which is provided separately. It can be used. This can contribute to downsizing of the entire dispensing device 700 together with the ball passage unit 730.

Moreover, the game balls stored in the second guiding path 730D in a full state can also be guided to join the discharge port 730B. As a result, a large number of game balls in the first guiding path 730C can be collectively discharged from one discharge port 730B, and the clogging of game balls inside the payout device 700 can be avoided as quickly as possible. It can be resolved.

According to the pachinko game machine Y, the projecting piece member 830 separates the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 while allowing the game balls to enter into the play spaces 810D and 820D at the back, Since the game balls 810D and 820D can be shaken down to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850 along the bottom surfaces 810Da and 820Da while contacting the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830, the ball detection unit There is no possibility of ball biting between the game balls inside the ball 800, and ball jamming of the game balls near the outlet 55 can be effectively prevented.

In addition, since the projecting piece member 830 can guide the game balls so as to distribute them left and right from the front to the back along the direction in which the game balls enter, there is no risk of ball biting between the game balls, and the first The game ball can be smoothly guided to either the detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850.

In addition, the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 is formed to rise (bulge) toward the back side, so that the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 is formed so as to rise (bulge) as it goes to the back side, so that it can be raised as much as possible while allowing the game ball to enter the play spaces 810D and 820D. It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to gradually fall to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850, and at the front part of the upper end 830A, the first detection sensor can be used without restricting the traveling direction of the game ball. It can be guided to both the sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850.

In addition, although the projecting piece member 830 separates the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850, it does not completely partition them, and the upper end 830A has a peak shape, so that it does not catch the game ball that enters. It can be smoothly guided to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850.

According to the pachinko game machine Y, since the game board relay board 101 is erected at a substantially right angle to the game board 1A, the game board is mounted on the back side of the game board 1A compared to the case where it is mounted on the surface of the game board 1A. The installation space for the relay board 101 can be reduced. Furthermore, by covering the first large winning opening solenoid 53b with the cover member 430, it is possible to protect the connecting portion between the first large winning opening solenoid 53b and the game board relay board 101. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that can protect the board from external impact while reducing the installation space for the board on the back side of the game board.

In addition, an opening is provided in the cover member 430 at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101, and the game board relay board 101 is located at a position where the connection operation to the connector connecting portion 101a can be performed from the outside of the cover member 430 through this opening. and at least the outer part of the game board relay board 101 was covered with a cover member. Therefore, while protecting the game board relay board 101 from external impact, the connector connected to the game board relay board 101 can be pulled out of the cover member 430, or the game board relay board 101 can be pulled out from the cover member 430 with the cover member 430 attached. Since it becomes possible to attach and detach the connector to 101, it becomes possible to improve workability in assembling and maintaining the gaming machine.

In addition, since the game board relay board 101 is installed approximately perpendicularly to the game board 1A, the installation space for the game board relay board 101 on the back side of the game board 1A is larger than when it is attached to the game board 1A with a surface. It becomes possible to suppress the In addition, by making the game board relay board 101 foldable so that it is parallel to the game board 1A, it is possible to transport the game board 1A to which the game board relay board 101 is attached, stack it up, etc. Since the game board relay board 101 can be folded, the possibility of external force being applied to the game board relay board 101 is lower than when the game board relay board 101 is left vertically protruding from the game board 1A. Therefore, the risk of damage to the game board relay board 101 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce the risk of damage to the board while reducing the installation space for the board on the back side of the game board.

In addition, an opening 432e is provided in the cover member 430 at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101, and the game board relay board 101 can be connected to the connector connection part 101a from the outside of the cover member 430 through the opening 432e. and is arranged so that the wiring insertion port 101b of the connector connection part 101a faces the opening 432e with at least the outer part of the game board relay board 101 covered with the cover member 430. did. Therefore, while protecting the game board relay board 101 from external impact, the connector connected to the game board relay board 101 can be pulled out of the cover member 430, or the game board relay board 101 can be pulled out from the cover member 430 with the cover member 430 attached. Since it becomes possible to attach and detach the connector to 101, it becomes possible to improve workability in assembling and maintaining the game machine.

Furthermore, since at least one of the side surfaces 432 of the cover member 430 is sloped, the area in which gaming machine components such as the sub-control board 80A can be installed is larger compared to a case where the side surface portion 432 is not sloped when the depth dimension is the same. Since it becomes larger, it becomes possible to attach a wider variety of gaming machine component parts. Furthermore, since the gaming machine components can be accommodated in this inclined side surface portion 432, the gaming machine components protrude into the back surface portion 431 of the gaming machine compared to a case where the gaming machine components are concentrated on the back surface portion 431. It becomes possible to suppress the In addition, by providing an opening 432e in the inclined side surface portion 432 at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101, the installation space for the game board relay board 101 on the back side of the game board 1A is suppressed, and the cover member 430 is It becomes possible to further increase the installation area of the gaming machine components on the side surface portion 432.

In addition, since the game board relay board 101 is installed approximately perpendicularly to the game board 1A, the installation space for the game board relay board 101 on the back side of the game board 1A is larger than when it is attached to the game board 1A with a surface. It becomes possible to suppress the Furthermore, by covering the first large winning opening solenoid 53b with the cover member 430, it is possible to protect the connecting portion between the first large winning opening solenoid 53b and the game board relay board 101. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that can protect the board from external impact while reducing the installation space for the board on the back side of the game board.

Further, the first side recess 432a that can accommodate the relay board 100 is adjacent to the second side recess 432c and the recess 431a that can accommodate the main control board 70A and the sub-control board 80A, and the first side recess 432a is provided with an opening 432e that can be connected to the wiring from the game board 1A, so that parts provided on the game board 1A and the main control board 70A and sub-control board accommodated in the second side recess 432c and recess 431a are connected. The length of the wiring with each of the 80A can be shortened. Therefore, it becomes easier to check various gaming machine component parts and to route cables and the like.

According to the pachinko gaming machine Y, when attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko gaming machine Y, the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the cover member can be overlapped by roughly aligning the positions. The other opening of the second guide gutter 434 of 430 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving part 434a of one opening, and the other opening is inserted into one opening. The game ball is now in a state where it can flow down. In this way, the opening of either one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 can be roughly aligned without having to precisely align the opening of the other. By simply stacking the balls, one opening is inserted into the other opening, and the game balls can flow down, thereby improving the work efficiency of assembly. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve assembly work efficiency.

In addition, when attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko game machine Y, by overlapping the cover member 430 by roughly aligning the positions, the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter of the cover member 430 can be connected. 434 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving part 434a of one opening, and the other opening is connected to be inserted into one opening, so that the game ball can flow down. state. Further, the opening of either one of the third guide gutter 418 of the mounting frame 410 and the fourth guide gutter of the cover member 430 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving part 434a of one of the openings, and the other opening is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving part 434a of the one opening. By being connected so as to be inserted into the opening of the game ball, the game ball can flow down. In this way, the opening of one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 and the opening of the other, the third guide gutter 418 of the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430 You don't have to precisely align the openings on one side of the fourth guide gutter with the openings on the other, just roughly align them and overlap them so that the other opening can be inserted into one opening. Since the ball is connected to the ball and the game ball can flow down, the efficiency of assembly work can be improved. Furthermore, positioning when attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410 is possible at the two connecting parts of the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 and the third guide gutter 418 and the fourth guide gutter. Therefore, more accurate positioning is possible by roughly aligning the positions. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve assembly work efficiency.

In addition, when attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko game machine Y, by overlapping the cover member 430 by roughly aligning the positions, the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter of the cover member 430 can be connected. 434 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving part of one opening, and the other opening is connected to be inserted into one opening, so that the game ball can flow down. becomes. Further, the opening of either the third guide gutter 418 of the mounting frame 410 or the fourth guide gutter of the cover member 430 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving part of one of the openings, and the other opening is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving part of the one opening. By being connected so as to be inserted into the opening, the game ball will be in a state where it can flow down. In this way, the opening of one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 and the opening of the other, the third guide gutter 418 of the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430 You don't have to precisely align the openings on one side of the fourth guide gutter with the openings on the other, just roughly align them and overlap them so that the other opening can be inserted into one opening. Since the ball is connected to the ball and the game ball can flow down, the efficiency of assembly work can be improved. Furthermore, positioning when attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410 is possible at the two connecting parts of the first guide gutter 416 and the second guide gutter 434 and the third guide gutter 418 and the fourth guide gutter. Therefore, more accurate positioning is possible by roughly aligning the positions. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve assembly work efficiency.

Further, when attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko game machine Y, the cover members 430 are roughly aligned and overlapped. At this time, even if the positions of the openings are slightly shifted from each other, by pushing the cover member 430, the other opening is guided by the slope of the rib 434b of one opening, from the outer edge of the rib 434b to the inner edge. The game balls are moved to a position surrounded by the inner edge, and connected so that one opening is inserted into the other opening, and the game ball is in a state where it can flow down. In this way, the opening of either one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 can be roughly aligned without having to precisely align the opening of the other. By simply stacking the balls, one opening is inserted into the other opening, and the game ball can flow down, thereby improving the work efficiency of assembly. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve assembly work efficiency.

In addition, when attaching the cover member 430 to the mounting frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko game machine Y, by overlapping the cover member 430 by roughly aligning the positions, the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter of the cover member 430 can be connected. 434 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of one of the openings, and in the connection position fits into the part surrounded by the rib 434b, and is inserted into the one opening. When the other opening is inserted and connected, the game ball can flow down. In this way, the opening of either one of the first guide gutter 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide gutter 434 of the cover member 430 can be roughly aligned without having to precisely align the opening of the other. By simply stacking the balls, one opening is inserted into the other opening, and the game balls can flow down, thereby improving the work efficiency of assembly. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve assembly work efficiency.

Further, when the other opening is guided by the rib 434b of one opening, the outer edge of the other opening comes into contact with the rib 434b, but at this time, force is applied to the outer edge of the opening, causing the opening to This may cause deformation, which may impede the flow of game balls after connection. According to the present invention, by providing the engaging portion 416a on the outer edge of the opening of the other opening, the engaging portion 416a is brought into contact with the rib 434b, reducing the force applied to the outer edge of the opening, and after the connection, the game This makes it possible to prevent the ball from interfering with the flow of the ball.

According to the pachinko game machine Y, the game ball released from the payout port 901 rolls along the outer wall portion 930Ea while contacting it, and further rolls along the continuous curved outer peripheral portion 930B. The game balls are guided to the upstream side of the alignment section 920A in the alignment direction, and in the alignment section 920A, the plurality of game balls are aligned in a straight line and guided to the introduction port 920Ab. At that time, even if the first opening/closing lid 953A provided in the first opening 930F is in the open state, the game balls released from the payout port 901 do not fall into the first opening 930F and are released from the outer wall 930Ea to the outer periphery. It is guided from the rectifying section 930C to the alignment section 920A while rolling along the section 930B. Therefore, while ensuring a relatively long path length from the dispensing port 901 to the alignment section 920A by the rectifying section 930C, the outer wall section 930Ea of the storage section 930E and the alignment section 920A are prevented from falling from the first opening 930F. The outer peripheral part 930B is formed at a predetermined distance from the first opening 930F, and the outer peripheral part 930B is formed in a curved shape, so that it can smoothly fall and be discharged from the rectifying part 930C to the aligning part 920A. You can guide the game ball without letting it move.

In addition, the game balls released from the payout port 901 are guided in a detour to the rectifying section 930C without directly reaching the aligning section 920A, and then guided from the rectifying section 930C to the aligning section 920A. are guided to the introduction port 920Ab in a straightly aligned state. This also allows the game balls to be smoothly guided from the rectifying section 930C to the alignment section 920A without clogging the balls.

Further, since the rectifying section 930C and the alignment section 920A are formed on the outside and inside of the cover section 930A, this also ensures a relatively long path length from the dispensing port 901 to the alignment section 920A. The width dimension and installation space of the entire dish unit 900 can be reduced.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent further released game balls from riding on the game balls aligned in the alignment part 920A, disrupting the alignment, causing ball jams, and preventing the game balls from flying out from the tray unit 900.

Furthermore, by forming the curved rectifying section 930C, it is possible to ensure a relatively long path length from the dispensing port 901 to the alignment section 920A, thereby reducing the overall width and installation space of the tray unit 900. The game balls can be smoothly guided from the rectifying section 930C to the aligning section 920A.
In addition, in this embodiment, although the alignment part 930C is formed between the outer wall 930Aa of the cover part 930A of the saucer cover member 930 itself and the outer peripheral part 930B, a cover member that simply covers the alignment part is provided, In addition to the alignment part, a slope part or a storage part may be provided between the outside of the cover member and the curved inner peripheral part of the dish unit main body.

“Third embodiment”
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment will be explained with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the same or similar components as those in the first and second embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted. FIGS. 85 to 135 are diagrams for explaining a pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

The pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment mainly includes an assembly structure of a board case 2800 that accommodates the main control board 28, an attachment structure of the board case 2800 to the board unit 34, a shape and shape of the front door (front frame) 3, and the like. It is characterized by the structure, the internal structure of the firing handle 26b, and the movable structure of the blower mechanism 110. These characteristic structures will be explained in order below with reference to the drawings.

[Assembly structure of board case]
85 and 86 are perspective views of the board unit 34, FIG. 87 is a front view of the board unit 34, FIGS. 88 and 89 are perspective views of the board case 2800, FIGS. 90 and 91 are exploded perspective views of the board case 2800, 92 is a front view of the board case 2800, FIG. 93 is a rear view of the board case 2800, FIGS. 94 and 95 are side views of the upper member 2810 in the board case 2800, and FIG. 96 is a partially enlarged side view of the upper member 2810, 97 is an internal front view of the lower member 2820 in the board case 2800, FIG. 98 is a perspective view showing the state of the upper member 2810 and the lower member 2820 before they are assembled, and FIG. 99 is an internal front view of the upper member 2810 and the lower member 2820. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the state after assembly.

As shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the board case 2800 that accommodates the main control board 28 is attached to the base member 340 of the board unit 34 together with the sub-control board accommodating member 33a that accommodates the sub-control board 33 and the relay board 32. . The relay board 32 is attached to the lower part of the base member 340, the sub-control board housing member 33a is located above and to the left of the relay board 32, and is attached to the upper left part of the base member 340, and the board case 2800 is It is located on the upper right side of the relay board 32, and is attached to the upper right portion of the base member 340 while being close to the sub-control board housing member 33a.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the board case 2800 has an upper member 2810, a lower member 2820, and a cover member 2830 as main components. The upper member 2810, the lower member 2820, and the cover member 2830 are made of a transparent material that allows the inside to be visually recognized. As shown in FIG. 91, the main control board 28 is fixed to the back surface of the upper member 2810 via screws 2840. The main control board 28 is fixed in such a manner that the main surface on which electronic components such as the main CPU 280 (not shown) are mounted is directed toward the surface 2810a of the upper member 2810. The upper member 2810, to which the main control board 28 is fixed on the back surface, is assembled to the lower member 2820 by sliding it in the vertical direction, and the upper member 2810 and the lower member 2820 are sealed together to form an integral body. be converted into As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the cover member 2830 is attached to cover the upper ends 2811 and 2821 of the upper member 2810 and the lower member 2820 that are sealed together.

As shown in FIGS. 92 to 96, the upper member 2810 is formed into a lid shape with its longitudinal direction generally extending in the vertical direction, and has an upper end portion 2811, a terminal exposed portion 2812, a sealing portion 2813, and a peripheral portion 2814.

A sealing seal 2830A is attached to the upper end 2811 and the upper end 2821 of the lower member 2820, a seal stopper 2830B is fitted over it, and a cover member 2830 is placed over it (see FIGS. 90 to 92). ).

The terminal exposure portion 2812 has openings 2812a to 2812c for exposing various connection terminals 28a to 28c provided on the main control board 28 (see FIG. 92). The connection terminals 28a to 28c of the main control board 28 are exposed to the outside through openings 2812a to 2812c of the terminal exposure portion 2812, and are connected to external terminals (not shown).

The sealing portion 2813 is integrally formed at the left end portion of the upper member 2810. The sealing part 2813 is coupled and sealed with the sealing fixing part 2823 of the lower member 2820 via a screw 2850 or the like (see FIGS. 90 and 91). As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the sealing part 2813 has two screw holes 2813a corresponding to the screws 2850, and is connected to the left end of the upper member 2810 via a plurality of bridges 2813b. The sealing part 2813 is coupled to the sealing fixing part 2823 of the lower member 2820 through a screw 2850 in one screw hole 2813a. A sealing lid 2853 is fitted into the sealing portion 2813 to which the screw 2850 is fastened. After that, when the sealing part 2813 is to be uncoupled, the bridge 2813b on which the screw 2850 remains is cut out of the plurality of bridges 2813b to separate and destroy half of the sealing part 2813 (see FIG. 92). ), the connection is released with the screw 2850 remaining in the sealing fixing part 2823. The remaining screws 2850 are left behind in the sealing fixture 2823. Furthermore, after that, the sealing part 2813 can be fixed to the sealing fixing part 2823 again through the screw 2850 in the screw hole 2813a of the portion remaining after half destruction. That is, the upper member 2810 can be combined and sealed with the lower member 2820 up to two times via the sealing part 2813.

The peripheral edge portion 2814 is formed to extend rearward from the peripheral edge of the upper member 2810. As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, a plurality of engagement claws 2814A and 2814B are formed on the peripheral edge portion 2814 on both the left and right sides. Among the plurality of engagement claws 2814A, 2814B, the engagement claw 2814B closest to the sealing portion 2813 is partially different from the other engagement claws 2814A. In the following, the engaging claw 2814B will be described, but descriptions of the same parts of the other engaging claws 2814A as the engaging claw 2814B will be omitted unless otherwise specified.

As shown in FIG. 96, the engaging claw 2814B is formed in an L-shape and has a base end 2814Ba, a bent part 2814Bb, and a tip end 2814Bc. Furthermore, the engagement claw 2814B differs from other engagement claws 2814A in that it has a notch 2814Bd.

The base end portion 2814Ba is formed to protrude rearward from the peripheral edge portion 2814. The bent portion 2814Bb is formed to be bent at a right angle and connected from the base end 2814Ba to the distal end 2814Bc. The tip portion 2814Bc is formed to extend downward from the bent portion 2814Bb. In particular, the engaging claw 2814B is formed to extend toward the sealing portion 2813. The width of the portion from the base end 2814Ba to the bent portion 2814Bb is relatively wide, while the width of the portion from the bent portion 2814Bb to the tip portion 2814Bc is relatively narrow. As a result, the proximal end 2814Ba is relatively strong, and the distal end 2814Bc is relatively fragile. The cutout portion 2814Bd is formed in a narrow portion between the bent portion 2814Bb and the tip portion 2814Bc, more specifically, in a portion closer to the inside of the bent portion 2814Bb than the tip portion 2814Bc. Such a notch 2814Bd is provided so that when a force in the front-rear direction is applied to a narrow width portion from the bending portion 2814Bb to the tip end 2814Bc, the narrow portion is likely to be damaged.

As shown in FIG. 97, the lower member 2820 is formed in a shape corresponding to the upper member 2810 with the vertical direction as the longitudinal direction, and has an upper end portion 2821, a sealing fixing portion 2823, a peripheral portion 2824, and It has a pair of shaft portions 2825 for connecting to a base member 340 of a substrate unit 34, which will be described later.

The upper end portion 2821 is coupled and sealed with the upper end portion 2811 of the upper member 2810 using a caulking pin (not shown) or the like. A sealing seal 2830A is attached to the combined and sealed upper end portions 2811 and 2821, a seal stopper 2830B is fitted over the sealing seal 2830A, and a cover member 2830 is placed over the sealing seal 2830A (see FIGS. 90 to 92).

The sealing fixing portion 2823 is integrally formed at the left end portion of the lower member 2820 so as to correspond to the sealing portion 2813 of the upper member 2810. The sealing fixing part 2823 accommodates a sealing cover 2851 and a sealing plate 2852 for fixing the screw 2850 when coupling and sealing the sealing part 2813 of the upper member 2810 (FIGS. 90 and 91). reference). The sealing fixing part 2823 is fixed by screws 2850 being fastened to the sealing cover 2851 and the sealing plate 2852 through the screw holes 2813a of the sealing part 2813.

The peripheral portion 2824 has engagement holes 2824A at a plurality of locations corresponding to the engagement claws 2814A and 2814B. The engagement hole 2824A is formed in a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction into which a portion of the engagement claws 2814A, 2814B from the bent portion 2814Bb to the tip portion 2814Bc can be inserted. When the engagement claws 2814A and 2814B are initially inserted into the engagement hole 2824A, the upper member 2810 is slightly shifted upward relative to the lower member 2820, as shown in FIG. Combine. Thereafter, by sliding the entire upper member 2810 downward, the engagement claws 2814A and 2814B are engaged with the engagement hole 2824A. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 99, the upper member 2810 is completely assembled to the lower member 2820 via the engaging claws 2814A, 2814B. The upper member 2810 and the lower member 2820 assembled in this way and sealed by the sealing part 2813 and the sealing fixing part 2823, etc., will be damaged if you try to forcefully open the vicinity of the sealing part 2813 in the front and back direction. An excessive force will be applied in the front-rear direction to the engagement claw 2814B closest to the engagement claw 2814B. As a result, the portion of the engaging claw 2814B where the cutout portion 2814Bd is formed is likely to be damaged.

The shaft portion 2825 is a portion for rotatably attaching the entire board case 2800 to the base member 340, and is integrally formed at the left end portion of the lower member 2820. A rotating shaft 2825A is formed in the shaft portion 2825 so as to protrude downward. The board case 2800 is attached to the base member 340 via such a shaft portion 2825, which will be described later.

According to such an assembly structure of the board case 2800, when the engaging claws 2814A, 2814B and the engaging hole 2824A are slidably engaged with the upper member 2810 and the lower member 2820 assembled to each other in the vertical direction If you try to pry the board case 2800 open by applying an external force in the vertical direction, the area around the notch 2814Bd of the engaging claw 2814B is likely to be damaged. The missing engagement claw 2814B can be reliably left as a trace.

In addition, a large shearing force acts on the thin part of the engagement claw 2814B extending from the bent part 2814Bb to the tip part 2814Bc, and the vicinity of the notch part 2814Bd in that part is likely to be damaged. When an attempt is made to pry it open, the missing engagement claw 2814B can be reliably left behind as a trace.

Furthermore, if an attempt is made to forcefully open the vicinity of the sealing part 2813 and the sealing fixing part 2823, a large shearing force acts on the thin part of the engaging claw 2814B closest to the sealing part 2813, and the cutout part 2814Bd Since the vicinity is likely to be damaged, if an attempt is made to pry open the board case by an unauthorized method, the damaged engagement claw 2814B can be reliably left behind as a trace.

[Mounting structure in the board unit of the board case]
100 and 101 are perspective views showing the rotational state of the board case 2800 in the board unit 34, FIGS. 102 to 104 are perspective views showing the state in which the board case 2800 is attached to the base member 340 of the board unit 34, and FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view showing the state before the board case 2800 is attached to the base member 340 of the board unit 34, FIG. 108 is a perspective view showing the rotating state of the board case 2800 in the board unit 34, and FIG. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view showing the sealing member 3410 attached to the base member 340 of the board unit 34, and is a top view showing the rotating state of the board case 2800 in the board unit 34.

As shown in FIGS. 100, 101, and 108, the board case 2800 is rotatably attached to the base member 340 of the board unit . Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, a sealing member 3410 can be fixed and sealed on the right side of the base member 340 near the location where the sub-control board accommodating member 33a is disposed. A fixed portion 340A and a pair of bearing portions 340B and 340C capable of pivotally supporting the shaft portion 2825 of the board case 2800 are formed. The upper bearing part 340B is provided directly below the sealing fixing part 340A. The board case 2800 is assembled to the base member 340 by inserting the rotating shaft 2825A of the shaft portion 2825 into the bearing portions 340B and 340C from above. Further, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, an engagement hook 340a is provided at the right end of the base member 340, and a recess 2800a is provided at the right end of the board case 2800. By locking the engagement hook 340a in the recess 2800a, the board case 2800 is arranged non-rotatably with respect to the base member 340. Further, after the board case 2800 is assembled to the base member 340 via the shaft portion 2825, the sealing member 3410 is fixed to the sealing fixing portion 340A. The lower end portion of this sealing member 3410 is close to or in contact with the shaft portion 2825 inserted into the upper bearing portion 340B. Thereby, the sealing member 3410 restricts vertical sliding of the shaft portion 2825 in the bearing portion 340B, and functions as a stopper to prevent the shaft portion 2825 from coming off from the bearing portion 340B while being rotatable.

As shown in FIG. 109, the sealing member 3410 has two screw holes 3411 that correspond to the screws 3420. A vertical groove 3412 is formed between the two screw holes 3411 to make it easier to break the sealing member 3410 in half. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107, a sealing cover 3440 and a sealing plate 3450 for fixing the screw 3420 when fixing and sealing the sealing member 3410 are housed in the sealing fixing part 340A. The sealing member 3410 is fixed to the sealing fixing part 340A by fastening screws 3420 to the sealing cover 3440 and the sealing plate 3450 through the screw holes 3411 of the sealing member 3410. Such a sealing member 3410 is fixed to the sealing fixing part 340A through a screw 3420 in one screw hole 3411 (specifically, the upper screw hole 3411). A sealing lid 3430 is fitted into the screw hole 3411 of the sealing member 3410 to which the screw 3420 is fastened (see FIG. 107). After that, when releasing the fixation of the sealing member 3410, the sealing member 3410 is cut along the vertical groove 3412 to separate and destroy the upper half of the sealing member 3410, and the screw 3420 is attached to the sealing fixing part 340A. The fixation is canceled while leaving the . The remaining screws 3420 are left behind in the sealing fixing part 340A. Furthermore, after that, the sealing member 3410 can be fixed to the sealing fixing part 340A again through the screws 3420 in the screw holes 3411 in the lower half remaining after the half destruction. That is, the sealing member 3410 can be fixed and sealed to the sealing fixing part 340A up to two times. Further, even if the upper half of the sealing member 3410 is destroyed, the shaft portion 2825 inserted into the upper bearing portion 340B approaches or contacts the lower end of the lower half, so that the shaft portion 2825 is moved in the vertical direction. The shaft portion 2825 can function as a stopper to prevent the shaft portion 2825 from coming off the bearing portion 340B.

As shown in FIG. 104, when the board case 2800 is attached to the base member 340 and the sealing member 3410 is fixed to the sealing fixing part 340A, the upper shaft part 2825 is connected to the sealing member 3410 and the bearing part 340B. Movement in the vertical direction is restricted between the two. As a result, the board case 2800 cannot be removed from the base member 340 of the board unit 34. On the other hand, if the sealing member 3410 is released from being fixed to the sealing fixing part 340A, the shaft part 2825 can be pulled out upward from the bearing part 340B, and the board case 2800 can be removed from the base member 340.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 110, when the engagement state of the engagement hook 340a is released from the recess 2800a of the board case 2800, the board case 2800 rotates around the shaft part 2825 and rotates toward the base member 340. It is possible to take a rotated position. Thereby, the state of the main control board 28 housed inside can be visually confirmed not only from the front side of the board case 2800 but also from the back side.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 110, when the board case 2800 is rotated to a certain angle (for example, 30 degrees or 45 degrees), the left end of the board case 2800 comes into contact with the sealing member 3410. Thereby, the board case 2800 can be rotated to a rotational position in which the inside can be viewed from the back side without interfering with the sub-control board accommodating member 33a adjacent to the left side of the board case 2800.

According to such a mounting structure of the board case 2800 in the board unit 34, the vertical movement of the board case 2800 with respect to the base member 340 of the board unit 34 can be restricted by the sealing member 3410, while the board Since the case 2800 can be rotated while the rotation angle can be restricted, the board case 2800 can be rotated to a certain rotation angle without removing it from the base member 340, and the inside of the case can be accessed from the back side of the board case 2800. The main control board 28 can be easily confirmed.

Furthermore, even if the board case 2800 is rotated toward the sub-control board accommodating member 33a, the rotation angle until the left end of the board case 2800 contacts the sealing member 3410, that is, the left end of the board case 2800 comes into contact with the sub-control board accommodating member 33a. Since the board case 2800 can be rotated to a certain rotation angle, the board case 2800 can be rotated to a certain rotation angle without removing it from the base member 340 separately from the sub-control board housing member 33a, and the board case 2800 can be rotated to a certain rotation angle. The main control board 28 inside the case can be easily confirmed from the back side.

[Shape and structure of front door]
111 is a perspective view showing the front door 3, FIG. 112 is a side view showing the front door 3, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view showing the front door 3, and FIGS. 114 and 115 are transparent plates in the front door 3. 116 is a front view showing the transparent plate unit 7' in the front door 3, FIG. 117 is a rear view showing the transparent plate unit 7' in the front door 3, and FIG. 118 is a front view showing the transparent plate unit 7' in the front door 3. 119 and 120, which are side views showing the transparent plate unit 7' in the door 3, are exploded perspective views showing the assembled state of the front door 3. In addition, in this embodiment, what corresponds to the front frame 3 of 1st Embodiment mentioned above is called the front door 3.

As shown in FIGS. 111 to 113, the front door 3 of this embodiment has a transparent plate unit 7' as a component different from the front frame 3 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1 and the like. The right side base plate 3aa and the left side base plate 3ab are attached to the front surface of the overall base plate 3ac. An opening 3h is formed in the overall base plate 3ac, and the transparent plate unit 7' is attached to the back surface of the overall base plate 3ac so that its main front portion projects forward from the opening 3h.

As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the transparent plate unit 7' includes a first transparent member 7A located on the back side, a second transparent member 7B located on the front side, and a decorative sheet 7C. The first transparent member 7A and the second transparent member 7B are made of a transparent and easily moldable material, such as acrylic resin. The decorative sheet 7C is made of a transparent or translucent sheet material.

As shown in FIGS. 115 and 117, the first transparent member 7A is generally formed into a flat plate shape, and has an opening 7Aa, a pair of recesses 7Ab, and a pair of rotation locking pieces 7Ac. The opening 7Aa is formed to expose the central region (the region including the display region 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4) other than the rolling region (game region 1p) of the game board 1 to the front. That is, the first transparent member 7A restricts the forward movement of the game ball in the rolling area (gaming area 1p) and makes the rolling game ball visible from the front, while for example, the movable performance accessory 1321 can be moved forward from the opening 7Aa (see FIGS. 119 and 120). The pair of recesses 7Ab are provided at the lower end of the first transparent member 7A, and the pair of rotation locking pieces 7Ac are provided at the upper end of the first transparent member 7A. The first transparent member 7A is configured such that after an engaging claw 7Bd (described later) of the second transparent member 7B is engaged with the recess 7Ab, the rotation locking piece 7Ac is rotated to lock the first transparent member 7A to the upper end of the second transparent member 7B. is assembled to the second transparent member 7B.

As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116 and 118, the second transparent member 7B is formed so that its main portion bulges forward, and includes a front surface portion 7Ba, a side surface portion 7Bb, a peripheral portion 7Bc, and a pair of engaging portions. It has a matching claw 7Bd and a pair of convex portions 7Be. The front part 7Ba and the side part 7Bb are formed as main parts of the second transparent member 7B.

As shown in FIG. 118, the front portion 7Ba is formed in the shape of an inclined surface so as to gradually protrude forward from the bottom to the top. An opening 7Aa of the first transparent member 7A is arranged at the back of such a front part 7Ba (see FIGS. 114, 115, and 117). Thereby, the front portion 7Ba is arranged to face the game board 1 (see FIG. 119). As shown in FIGS. 118 to 120, the upper part of the front part 7Ba forms a sufficient space between the upper part and the game board 1 in which the movable performance accessory 1321 can operate than the lower part. As shown in FIGS. 116 and 118, the side surface portion 7Bb is formed in an inclined surface shape so as to expand slightly outward as it goes rearward from the outer peripheral portion of the front surface portion 7Ba, and extends from the front surface portion 7Ba to the peripheral edge portion 7Bc. It is formed in a continuous manner. The side surface portion 7Bb is formed in a curved shape around the front surface portion 7Ba so as to draw an arc in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. A decorative sheet 7C is attached to the side surface portion 7Bb. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the first transparent member 7A is brought into contact with the back surface of the peripheral edge 7Bc. As shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, an engaging claw 7Bd is formed at the lower end of the peripheral edge 7Bc so as to protrude rearward, and a convex portion 7Be is formed so as to protrude downward. . In the second transparent member 7B, the engaging claw 7Bd is engaged with the recess 7Ab of the first transparent member 7A, and then the rotation locking piece 7Ac of the first transparent member 7A is engaged with the upper end of the peripheral edge 7Bc. As a result, it is integrated with the first transparent member 7A. As shown in FIG. 113, the transparent plate unit 7' in which the first transparent member 7A and the second transparent member 7B are integrally assembled has a front part 7Ba and a side part 7Bb facing forward from the opening h of the overall base plate 3ac. It is assembled to the back surface of the overall base plate 3ac via the convex portion 7Be etc. in a protruding position.

The player can visually recognize the display area 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4 and the movable performance accessory 1321 through the front surface 7Ba and opening 7Aa of the transparent plate unit 7'. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 118 to 120, the movable performance accessory 1321 can move largely in the front and back direction, and the dynamic movement of the movable performance accessory 1321 can be shown to the player. Further, the player can visually recognize the game ball rolling in the rolling area (gaming area 1p) from the front part 7Ba and the side part 7Bb through the outer edge portion of the opening 7Aa of the first transparent member 7A. Note that the first transparent member 7A and the second transparent member 7B may be integrally molded.

According to the front door 3 equipped with such a transparent plate unit 7', the upper part of the front part 7Ba of the second transparent member 7B that protrudes forward and the side surface that is connected to the front part 7Ba in a curved shape and are integrally formed. The portion 7Bb is configured as a decorative portion of the front door 3, and the game board 1 provided with illumination etc. can be seen seamlessly through the front portion 7Ba and the side portion 7Bb. The door 3 can be easily assembled, the cost of parts can be reduced while reducing the weight, and the visual effect can be enhanced.

[Internal structure of firing handle]
121 is a perspective view showing the firing handle 26b, FIGS. 122 and 123 are exploded perspective views showing the firing handle 26b, FIG. 124 is an exploded side view showing the firing handle 26b, and FIG. 125 is a handle in the firing handle 26b. 126 is a rear view showing the handle grip 26d on the firing handle 26b, FIG. 127 is a front view showing the base member 26k on the firing handle 26b, and FIG. 128 is a front view showing the base member 26k on the firing handle 26b. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 124, the firing handle 26b of this embodiment has a base member 26k as a component different from the firing handle 26b of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1 and the like. The base member 26k is made of a non-conductive material, is located on the back side of the handle cap 26h and the handle grip 26d, and is housed inside the housing case 26c.

As shown in FIGS. 122, 123, 125, and 126, the handle grip 26d includes two penetration parts 26da and a boss part 26db into which a handle shaft 26i protruding forward from the firing volume 26m can be inserted and fixed. has. The penetrating portion 26da penetrates in the rotation axis direction (front-back direction) and is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the circumferential direction (rotation direction). The peripheral edge of the handle grip 26d is made of a conductive material, and when the player's hand comes into contact with the peripheral edge of the handle grip 26d, the touch sensor 26p detects the contact. The touch sensor 26p is provided on the back side of the handle grip 26d (see FIGS. 123 and 126).

As shown in FIG. 123, the housing case 26c is provided with a plurality of screw holes 26ca. The handle cap 26h is provided with a boss portion 26ha at a location corresponding to the screw hole 26ca of the housing case 26c. The base member 26k is provided with a screw hole kb at a location corresponding to the screw hole 26ca of the storage case 26c and the boss portion 26ha of the handle cap 26h. The handle cap 26h and the base member 26k are fixed to the housing case 26c by screwing a screw 26cb inserted into the screw hole 26ca into the boss portion 26ha and the screw hole kb. On the other hand, the handle grip 26d is relatively movable in the rotational direction while the boss portion 26ha and the screw 26cb screwed into the screw hole kb pass through the penetration portion 26da. Thereby, the handle grip 26d is rotatable around the handle shaft 26i.

As shown in FIGS. 122, 123, 127, and 128, the base member 26k is provided with a firing stop button 26e so as to be exposed outward from the periphery, has a recess 26ka on the front side, and has a recess 26ka on the back side. A firing stop switch 26g and a firing volume 26m are provided on the side. The touch sensor 26p provided on the back side of the handle grip 26d is located in the internal space of the recess 26ka, and is rotatable together with the handle grip 26d in this internal space. When the firing stop button 26e is pressed, the firing stop switch 26g detects the pressing. The firing volume 26m changes the resistance value according to the rotation angle of the handle grip 26d, and supplies electric power according to the resistance value to a solenoid actuator of the firing device (not shown). According to such a base member 26k, since the firing stop switch 26g and the firing volume 26m as electronic components are provided on the back side of the base member 26k, the conductive handle grip 26d disposed on the front side of the base member 26k. (See the dotted line shown in Figure 124), which ensures sufficient electrical insulation from the handle grip 26d, etc., effectively preventing malfunctions of the firing stop switch 26g and firing volume 26m. It can be prevented. Furthermore, the base member 26k is housed inside the housing case 26c, unlike the housing case 26c, the handle cap 26h, and the handle grip 26d, which are easily scratched and dirty as exterior parts, so that it can be effectively reused as a recycled product. I can do it.

According to such a firing handle 26b, when reusing the firing handle 26b as a recycled product, the firing stop switch 26g and the firing volume 26m can be installed by simply replacing the housing case 26c, handle cap 26h, and handle grip 26d. Since the base member 26k can be reused as is, recyclability can be improved without requiring complicated work such as removing electronic components when reusing it as a recycled product.

In addition, since the firing stop switch 26g and the firing volume 26m are provided on the back side of the base member 26k, the creepage distance to the conductive periphery of the handle cap 26h arranged on the front side of the base member 26k is increased. This can effectively prevent malfunctions of the firing stop switch 26g and the firing volume 26m.

[Movable structure of ventilation mechanism]
129 is a perspective view showing the ventilation mechanism 110, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view showing the ventilation mechanism 110, FIG. 131 is an internal plan view showing the inside of the ventilation mechanism 110, and FIG. 132 shows the operation of the ventilation mechanism 110. 133 is a left side view for explaining the operation of the ventilation mechanism 110, FIG. 134 is an internal plan view for explaining the operation of the ventilation mechanism 110, and FIG. 135 is the ventilation mechanism 110 is a left side view for explaining the operation of the device 110. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 130, the air blowing mechanism 110 of this embodiment includes a first link member 120, a second link member 121, a variable flap 130, and a variable flap 130 as different components from the air blowing mechanism 110 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. has. Moreover, elliptical openings 110c and 110b for guiding wind are formed in the cover members 110A and 110B.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 134, an opening 110c is formed in the cover member 110A in a direction straight from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e (see FIG. 16), and a space is formed inside the opening 110c. 110a is provided. In the space portion 110a, the variable flap 130 is movable between an inclined position and a horizontal position. The lower part of the space 110a is always open regardless of the tilted position or horizontal position of the variable flap 130, and the above-mentioned ventilation port 8ca is located therein (see FIG. 16). As shown in FIG. 130, an opening 110b is formed in the cover member 110B in a direction that goes straight in the left-right direction from the opening 110c of the cover member 110A.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 134, the solenoid 111 has a plunger 111a that can be retracted and protruded in conjunction with on/off operations, and the tip of the plunger 111a is connected to the base end 120a of the first link member 120. is connected to. The first link member 120 has an intermediate portion 120b rotatably supported by the cover member 110A. A distal end portion 120c of the first link member 120 is connected to a proximal end portion 121a of the second link member 121. The second link member 121 has an elongated opening 121b, and a pin 110d protruding from the back surface of the cover member 110A is arranged in the opening 121b so that it can move relatively freely. Thereby, the second link member 121 is supported so as to be vertically movable via the pin 110d. The distal end portion 121c of the second link member 121 is connected to one end portion of the variable flap 130 while being movable from side to side. As shown in FIG. 132, when the plunger 111a of the solenoid 111 protrudes downward, the second link member 121 is located relatively above the first link member 120, and accordingly, the variable flap 130 is placed at the upper end. The body is in a raised position (tilted position). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, when the plunger 111a of the solenoid 111 is in a retracted state, the second link member 121 is located relatively lower than the first link member 120, and accordingly, the variable flap 130 is moved downward. The upper end is pulled down (horizontal posture).

As shown in FIG. 130, the lower end of the variable flap 130 is rotatably supported via a rotating shaft 131 in the space 110a, and the upper end is normally closer to the opening 110c than the lower end. It is maintained in a tilted posture (the posture shown by the solid line in FIG. 130). On the other hand, when the plunger 111a of the solenoid 111 is in the retracted state as described above, the variable flap 130 assumes a horizontal position that closes the lower part of the space 110a (the position shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 130). As shown in FIG. 131, a resilient buffer member 132 is attached near the upper edge of the opening 110b on the inner side of the cover member 110B. When the variable flap 130 is in the inclined position, the wind flow acts as a force that pushes the variable flap 130 in the direction of the buffer member 132, so that the upper end portion of the variable flap 130 comes into close contact with the buffer member 132. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent wind from leaking through the gap between the opening 110b and the variable flap 130. On the right side of the opening 110b, the air outlet 80 as shown in FIGS. 13, 15, and 16 described above is located.

When the variable flap 130 is in an inclined position, the wind sent out from the opening 10ec (see FIG. 16) is blocked by the variable flap 130 and is guided below the space 110a without passing through the opening 110b (see FIG. 133). The wind guided below the space 110a is sent out to the outside through the vent 8ca (see FIG. 16) of the undercover 8c. On the other hand, when the variable flap 130 is in a horizontal position, the wind sent out from the opening 10ec (see FIG. 16) flows almost straight without being obstructed by the variable flap 130, and passes straight through the space 110a to the opening 110b. (See Figure 135). The wind that has passed through the opening 110b is sent out to the outside through the air outlet 80 (see FIGS. 15 and 16) of the lower right side cover 8ba. The firing handle 26b of the firing device 26 is arranged at a position generally directly facing the ventilation opening 80, and the wind coming out of the ventilation opening 80 hits the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b. In this way, normally the wind is guided downward toward the firing handle 26b without leaking, but when the wind is guided toward the firing handle 26b in response to a performance sound, etc., the air is guided downward from the opening 10ec. Since the air flow path leading to the portion 110a, the openings 110c, 110b, and the air outlet 80 is formed generally straight, the air can reach the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b without weakening the wind pressure as much as possible. can.

According to such an air blowing mechanism 110, when the airflow flowing out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e as sound is output from the speaker 10c is linearly guided by the horizontal attitude of the variable flap 130, the ejection handle 26b On the other hand, if the variable flap 130 bends and is guided downward due to the tilted posture of the variable flap 130, it will no longer be guided toward the firing handle 26b. The air flow can be guided with a sufficient amount of air without resistance, and the speaker unit 10 can be made smaller and simpler.

Furthermore, even when the variable flap 130 is in an inclined position, the airflow can be prevented from leaking from between the upper end of the variable flap 130 and the opposing contact surface by the buffer member 132. While guiding the airflow with a sufficient amount of air without resistance, it is possible to prevent the airflow from leaking toward the firing handle 26b when guiding the airflow downward.

“Fourth embodiment”
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to the drawings. Incidentally, the same or similar components as those according to the first to third embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted. FIGS. 136 to 180 are diagrams for explaining a pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 136 to 180, illustrations of parts are omitted as appropriate for convenience.

The pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment mainly includes the operation and structure of the first production unit 4000 in the main body subunit 440, the operation and structure of the second production unit 5000 in the main body subunit 440, and the ball passage structure of the game board 1. It has the following characteristics. These characteristic structures will be explained in order below with reference to the drawings.

[Structure of main unit subunit]
136 and 137 are perspective views showing the main body subunit 440, FIG. 138 is a front view showing the main body subunit 440, and FIGS. 139 and 140 are exploded perspective views showing the main body subunit 440.

The main body sub-unit 440 of this embodiment is for integrally mounting the game board 1, liquid crystal display device 4, etc. on the mounting frame 410 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) of the main body unit 400 (not shown). . As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the main body subunit 440 includes a main body case 441, a game board 1, a liquid crystal display device 4, a first presentation unit 4000, a second presentation unit 5000, and a decoration unit 6000. be done.

The main body case 441 has an opening 442 that exposes the display area 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the front, and is formed in a rectangular box shape. The liquid crystal display device 4 is attached to the back surface of the main body case 441 so that the display area 4d faces the opening 442. A first performance unit 4000 is arranged from the left and right side parts to the lower part of the front rear side of the main body case 441. A first performance unit 4000 is arranged in the front interior of the main body case 441 from the left and right side parts to the lower part. A second presentation unit 5000 is attached to the upper part of the front interior of the main body case 441. A decoration unit 6000 is attached to the lower part of the front interior of the main body case 441 so as to be located forward of the first presentation unit 4000. The game board 1 is attached to the front of the main body case 441. The game board 1 is formed with an opening area 1d for exposing the display area 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the front, and a game area 1p in which a game ball can roll is formed around the outer periphery of this opening area 1d. Ru. The opening area 1d not only allows the display area 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4 to face forward, but also allows the player to visually see the first presentation unit 4000 and the second presentation unit 5000 that appear overlapping the display area 4d. possible. Such an opening area 1d becomes a viewing surface where the appearance of the first effect unit 4000 etc. can be seen. The decoration unit 6000 is arranged so as to be visible to the player through the transparent lower part of the game board 1. The first presentation unit 4000 and the second presentation unit 5000 will be described later. Further, the ball passage cover 7000 and the like provided on the game board 1 will also be described later.

[First production unit]
141 is a perspective view showing the first presentation unit 4000, FIG. 142 is a front view showing the first presentation unit 4000, FIG. 143 is a rear view showing the first presentation unit 4000, and FIG. 144 is a first presentation unit 145 is a top view showing a part of the first production unit 4000, FIG. 146 is a front view for explaining the operation of the lower unit 4100 in the first production unit 4000, and FIG. 147 is a side view showing the first production unit 4000. 148 is a rear view for explaining the operation of the lower unit 4100 in the first production unit 4000, FIG. 148 is a front view for explaining the operation of the left unit 4200 in the first production unit 4000, and FIG. 149 is the first production unit 150 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the left unit 4200 in the first production unit 4000, and FIG. 151 is a right unit in the first production unit 4000. 152 is a rear view for explaining the operation of the right unit 4300 in the first production unit 4000, and FIG. 153 is a front view for explaining the operation of the right unit 4300 in the first production unit 4000. 154 is a side view for explaining the operation of the right unit 4300 in the first production unit 4000, and FIG. 155 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the upright unit 4400 in the first production unit 4000. 156 is a front view for explaining the operation of the upright unit 4400 in the first production unit 4000, and FIG. 157 is a side view for explaining the operation of the upright unit 4400 in the first production unit 4000. 158 is a top view for explaining the operation of the upright unit 4400 in the first presentation unit 4000, and FIG. 159 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the upright unit 4400 in the first presentation unit 4000.

As shown in FIGS. 141 to 145, the first presentation unit 4000 includes a lower unit 4100, a left unit 4200, a right unit 4300, and an upright unit 4400. The lower unit 4100 is provided below the first presentation unit 4000 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The left unit 4200 is rotatably provided on the left side of the first presentation unit 4000 around a horizontal axis perpendicular to the opening area 1d (viewing surface). The right unit 4300 is rotatably provided on the right side of the first presentation unit 4000 around a horizontal axis perpendicular to the opening area 1d. The upright unit 4400 is arranged in front of the right unit 4300 and is provided so as to be reversible around a vertical axis along the opening area 1d.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the lower unit 4100 mainly includes a lower movable body 4110, a base member 4120, a pair of link members 4130, 4140, a rack member 4150, a plurality of gears 4160 to 4162, and a motor 4170. It is composed of The left unit 4200 mainly includes a left movable body 4210, a base member 4220, an arm member 4230, a plurality of gears 4240 to 4242, and a motor 4250. The right unit 4300 mainly includes a right movable body 4310, a base member 4320, an arm member 4330, a plurality of gears 4340 to 4343, and a motor 4350. As shown in FIGS. 141 to 145, the upright unit 4400 mainly includes an upright movable body 4410, a base member 4420, a plurality of gears 4430 to 4433, and a motor 4440.

[Lower unit]
In the lower unit 4100, the lower movable body 4110 is a member that can slide vertically from a retracted position below the opening area 1d that is not visible to the player to an emerging position near the lower edge of the opening area 1d. The lower movable body 4110 has a light emitting means inside and emits light when it appears. The structure of the lower movable body 4110 will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 143 and 147, a pair of left and right support portions 4111 and 4112 are provided on the back surface of the lower movable body 4110, and are provided in vertically elongated guide grooves 4121 and 4122 formed in the base member 4120. Support parts 4111 and 4112 are slidably supported. Further, the lower part of the lower movable body 4110 is in contact with the tip portions 4132, 4142 of the link members 4130, 4140, and when the link members 4130, 4140 rotate in a predetermined direction and the tip portions 4132, 4142 move upward, The lower movable body 4110 moves upward so as to be lifted by the tip portions 4132 and 4142 and appears at the appearance position. Conversely, when the link members 4130, 4140 rotate in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction and the tip portions 4132, 4142 move downward, the lower movable body 4110 moves downward as it is lifted by the tip portions 4132, 4142. Move and return to the evacuation position.

As shown in FIGS. 143, 146, and 147, in the lower unit 4100, the base member 4120 has the above-mentioned guide grooves 4121, 4122, and the tip portions 4132, 4142 of the link members 4130, 4140 can slide therein. Arc-shaped curved grooves 4123 and 4124 are formed to guide the guide. Pinions 4131, 4141 are provided at the base ends of the link members 4130, 4140, and when these pinions 4131, 4141 rotate, the distal ends 4132, 4142 of the link members 4130, 4140 fit into the curved grooves 4123, 4124. Rotate along. A rack member 4150 is arranged behind the base member 4120 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The rack member 4150 is formed with an upward rack 4151 and a downward rack 4152. The upward rack 4151 is engaged with the pinion 4131 of the left link member 4130, and the downward rack 4152 is engaged with the pinion 4141 of the right link member 4140.

Referring to FIG. 147, when the pinion 4131 on the right side of the figure rotates counterclockwise in the figure, the tip end 4132 of the link member 4130 rotates along the curved groove 4123 from below to above. At this time, the upward rack 4151 engaged with the pinion 4131 moves to the right in the figure, and the entire rack member 4150 also moves to the right in the figure. Then, the downward facing rack 4152 arranged on the left side in the figure also moves to the right in the figure. As a result, the pinion 4141 engaged with the downward rack 4152 rotates clockwise in the figure, and the tip 4142 of the link member 4140 rotates along the curved groove 4124 from below to above. When the pinion 4131 on the right side of the figure is rotated clockwise in the figure, the behavior is opposite to that described above. As a result, by simply rotating one pinion 4131, the pair of left and right link members 4130, 4140 can be interlocked, and their tips 4132, 4142 can be vertically displaced at the same time, thereby easily moving the lower movable body 4110 in the vertical direction. It can be moved by sliding.

Link members 4130, 4140, rack member 4150, a plurality of gears 4160 to 4162, and motor 4170 are provided on base member 4120 as driving means for vertically moving lower movable body 4110. The pinion 4131 of the link member 4130 receives the driving force of the motor 4170 via a plurality of gears 4160 to 4162, and can rotate in both forward and reverse directions depending on the rotation direction of the motor 4170.

[Left unit]
In the left unit 4200, the left movable body 4210 moves from a retracted position on the left side of the opening area 1d, which is not visible to the player, to an appearance position on the left side of the opening area 1d, which is in contact with the left side of the upper end of the lower movable body 4110 that has appeared in the opening area 1d. It is a member that can rotate around a horizontal axis along the front-back direction. The left movable body 4210 has a light emitting means inside and emits light when it appears. The structure of the left movable body 4210 is the same as that of the lower movable body 4110, so a description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, the left movable body 4210 is provided with a support portion 4211 at the end, and this support portion 4211 is rotatably supported by a base member 4220, which is omitted in the figure. . One end of an arm member 4230 is rotatably connected to the end of the left movable body 4210 that is spaced apart from the support portion 4211. The other end of arm member 4230 is rotatably connected to the side of gear 4242.

Referring to FIG. 149, when the gear 4242 rotates counterclockwise in the figure, the arm member 4230 applies a rotational moment to the end of the left movable body 4210. As a result, the left movable body 4210 rotates downward around the support portion 4211 and appears at the appearance position so as to be combined with the left side of the upper end of the lower movable body 4110. Conversely, when the gear 4242 rotates clockwise in the figure, the arm member 4230 applies a rotational moment in the opposite direction to the end of the left movable body 4210. As a result, the left movable body 4210 rotates upward around the support portion 4211 and returns to the retracted position away from the left upper end of the lower movable body 4110.

An arm member 4230, a plurality of gears 4240 to 4242, and a motor 4250 are provided on the base member 4220 as driving means for rotationally moving the left movable body 4210. Arm member 4230 receives the driving force of motor 4250 via a plurality of gears 4240 to 4242, and can rotate in both forward and reverse directions depending on the rotation direction of motor 4250.

[Right unit]
In the right unit 4300, the right movable body 4310 moves horizontally along the front-rear direction from a retracted position on the right side of the opening area 1d that is not visible to the player to an appearance position in contact with the right side of the upper end of the lower movable body 4110 that has appeared in the opening area 1d. It is a member that can rotate around an axis. The right movable body 4310 is located behind the upright movable body 4410 in the retracted position. The right movable body 4310 does not have a light emitting means inside, and when it appears, it appears to receive light from the lower movable body 4110 and emit light by itself. This will be described later together with the structure of the right movable body 4310. As shown in FIGS. 149 and 152, the right movable body 4310 is provided with a support portion at the end, although not shown, similarly to the left movable body 4210, and this support portion is omitted in the figure. It is rotatably supported by a base member 4320. One end of an arm member 4330 is rotatably connected to the end of the right movable body 4310 that is spaced apart from the support portion. The other end of arm member 4330 is rotatably connected to the side of gear 4343.

Referring to FIG. 152, when the gear 4343 rotates clockwise in the figure, the arm member 4330 applies a rotational moment to the end of the right movable body 4310. As a result, the right movable body 4310 rotates downward about the support portion and appears at the appearance position so as to be combined with the right side of the upper end of the lower movable body 4110. Conversely, when the gear 4343 rotates counterclockwise in the figure, the arm member 4330 applies a rotational moment in the opposite direction to the end of the right movable body 4310. As a result, the right movable body 4310 rotates upward around the support portion and returns to the retracted position away from the right upper end of the lower movable body 4110.

An arm member 4330, a plurality of gears 4340 to 4343, and a motor 4350 are provided on the base member 4320 as driving means for rotating the right movable body 4310. The driving force of the motor 4350 is transmitted to the arm member 4330 via a plurality of gears 4340 to 4343, and the arm member 4330 can rotate in both forward and reverse directions depending on the rotation direction of the motor 4350.

[Upright unit]
In the upright unit 4400, the upright movable body 4410 is disposed so as to be partially visible on the right side of the opening area 1d (see FIG. 138). The upright movable body 4410 has a front part 4410A and a back part 4410B, of which the back part 4410B is decorated with a motif design unified with the lower movable body 4110, the left movable body 4210, and the right movable body 4310. has been done. The upright movable body 4410 rotates around a vertical axis (rotation axis S) along the vertical direction from a retracted position in which the back part 4410B is face down to an emerging position where a part of the back part 4410B is visible on the right side of the opening area 1d. It is a possible member. As shown in FIG. 153, the upright movable body 4410 has a substantially U-shaped side view so that the front part 4410A is located forward of the rotation axis S when the back part 4410B is in the retracted position (face-down state). is formed. As a result, when the back surface portion 4410B is in the retracted position, a large space is formed behind the upright movable body 4410, and the right movable body 4310 is retracted using this space as a retract space. As shown in FIG. 157, when the right movable body 4310 rotates to the appearance position, the back surface portion 4410B can be reversed while occupying the retraction space of the right movable body 4310. That is, the back surface portion 4410B of the upright movable body 4410 is reversed from the retracted position and is in the emerging position (face-up state). The upright movable body 4410 has a light emitting means therein, and emits light when the back portion 4410B is inverted to face up. In addition, in front of the upright unit 4400, a ball recovery passage member 9000 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction at a position that is not exposed to the opening area 1d and does not overlap with the upright movable body 4410.

As shown in FIG. 159, the upright movable body 4410 is rotatably supported by a base member 4420 in the shape of a vertically long frame. As shown in FIG. 145, a gear 4433 is provided on the upper part of the upright movable body 4410, and the upright movable body 4410 rotates around the rotation axis S in conjunction with this gear 4433.

Referring to FIGS. 145, 151 to 153, and 155 to 157, as shown in FIGS. When the gear 4443 rotates clockwise in FIG. 145 in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the back surface portion 4410B appears at the appearance position in a face-up state. Conversely, as shown in FIGS. 155 to 157, when the gear 4443 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 145 when the front section 4410A of the upright movable body 4410 is facing down (the back section 4410B is facing up), , the upright movable body 4410 is reversed, and as shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the front part 4410A of the upright movable body 4410 is facing up, and the back part 4410B is facing down, and is in the retracted position. return.

A plurality of gears 4440 to 4443 and a motor 4440 are provided on the base member 4420 as driving means for reversing the upright movable body 4410 around the rotation axis S. The driving force of the motor 4450 is transmitted to the upright movable body 4410 through a plurality of gears 4440 to 4443, and can be rotated 180 degrees in both forward and reverse directions depending on the rotation direction of the motor 4450.

[Operation of the first production unit]
Next, the operation of the first effect unit 4000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 146 to 159.

First, the lower movable body 4110, the left movable body 4210, the right movable body 4310, and the upright movable body 4410 are initially in the retracted position. From this state, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the lower movable body 4110 moves from the lower retracted position to the upper emerging position. Then, although not particularly shown, the lower movable body 4110 appears along the lower edge of the opening area 1d of the game board 1.

Next, while the lower movable body 4110 is at the appearance position, the left movable body 4210 rotates from the left retracted position to the lower appearance position, as shown in FIGS. 148 to 150. As a result, the left movable body 4210 is in a state where it is joined to the left side of the upper end of the lower movable body 4110.

Next, with the lower movable body 4110 and the left movable body 4210 in the appearing position, the right movable body 4310 rotates from the right retracted position to the downward appearing position, as shown in FIGS. 151 to 154. As a result, the right movable body 4310 is in a state where it is integrated from the left side of the upper end of the lower movable body 4110 to the center of the upper end.

Next, when the lower movable body 4110, the left movable body 4210, and the right movable body 4310 are in the appearance position, the back surface portion 4410B of the upright movable body 4310 is finally moved as shown in FIGS. Flip from the face-down retreat position to the face-up appearance position. As a result, the back surface 4410B of the upright movable body 4310 is integrated with the lower movable body 4110, the left movable body 4210, and the right movable body 4310, giving an overall image of the performance with three-dimensional decoration of a unified motif. has completely appeared.

According to the first production unit 4000, a lower movable body 4110 that moves up and down, a left movable body 4210 and a right movable body 4310 that rotate around a horizontal axis, and an upright movable body 4410 that flips around a vertical axis, respectively. The different operating modes allow the player to sequentially appear in the opening area 1d of the game board 1, and the player can finally see the entire image of the performance, so the operating modes are diverse, and the dynamic effect when combined provides a variety of production effects. It can increase the sense of fun and interest.

In addition, after the lower movable body 4110, left movable body 4210, and right movable body 4310 appear in the opening area 1d of the game board 1, the upright movable body 4410 is reversed so that the front part 4410A is partially visible, so that the back part By making 4410B appear, the entire image of the production can be visually recognized through successive different motions, so that the fun and interest can be increased as a production effect with a variety of motion modes and interlocking.

[Light guiding structure of the first production unit]
FIG. 160 is a perspective view showing the lower movable body 4110, left movable body 4210, and right movable body 4310, and FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view showing the lower movable body 4110, left movable body 4210, and right movable body 4310. 162 is an exploded perspective view showing the right movable body 4310, FIG. 163 is a perspective view showing a part of the lower movable body 4110 and the right movable body 4310, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially cutaway side view showing a movable body 4310. Note that the first effect unit 4000 is characterized by the light guide structures of the lower movable body 4110 and the right movable body 4310, so these light guide structures will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 161, the lower movable body 4110 includes a base plate 4113, a light emitting board 4114, an intermediate frame member 4115, a plurality of light guide members 4116, a front decoration member 4117, and an upper edge lens member 4118. Ru. The left movable body 4210 includes an upper decorative member 4212, a front decorative member 4213, and an upper edge lens member 4214. The right movable body 4310 includes an upper decorative member 4311, a support member 4312, an upper edge lens member 4313, and an upper edge decorative member 4314.

In the lower movable body 4110, a light emitting board 4114 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 4113. As shown in FIG. 164, a plurality of LEDs 4114A are provided on the front surface of the light emitting board 4114, and light from the LEDs 4114A is emitted generally forward. An intermediate frame member 4115 is provided on the front surface of the light emitting board 4114 so as to expose the LED 4114A to the front. A plurality of light guide members 4116 are provided on the front surface of the intermediate frame member 4115 to guide light from the LEDs 4114A forward. The light guiding member 4116 guides the light from the LED 4114A not only forward but also to the side. Furthermore, a front decoration member 4117 is attached to the front surface of the intermediate frame member 4115 so as to cover the plurality of light guide members 4116. The front decorative member 4117 is formed as a transparent decorative lens with a design according to a motif. As shown in FIG. 164, the light from the LED 4114A is guided to the front decoration member 4117 through the light guide member 4116, and further transmitted through the front decoration member 4117 and irradiated forward. As shown in FIG. 163, a recess 4117A is formed in the upper center of the front decorative member 4117 for positioning an upper edge lens member 4313, which will be described later, which the right movable body 4310 approaches when the right movable body 4310 is assembled. Further, an upper edge lens member 4118 is attached to the upper right portion of the intermediate frame member 4115 so as to be close to the upper right end portion of the front decorative member 4117. The upper edge lens member 4118 is formed as a translucent decorative lens with a horizontally long wavy design according to the motif. Although not particularly illustrated, the light from the LED 4114A is guided to the upper edge lens member 4118 through the light guide member 4116, and is further transmitted through the upper edge lens member 4118 and irradiated forward. Note that the upper edge lens member 4118 is formed in the same shape as the upper edge lens member 4313 of the right movable body 4310, which will be described later.

Although details are not particularly shown, the left movable body 4210 has a built-in light emitting board and a light guiding member like the lower movable body 4110, and light from the LEDs on the light emitting board passes through the light guiding member and reaches the front decorative member 4213. The light is guided to the upper edge lens member 4214, passes through the front decorative member 4213 and the upper edge lens member 4214, and is irradiated forward.

The right movable body 4310, unlike the lower movable body 4110 and the left movable body 4210, does not include a light emitting board, and is configured to appear as if it emits light by itself using the light from the LED 4114A of the lower movable body 4110. ing. As shown in FIG. 161, in the right movable body 4310, the upper decorative member 4311 is formed into a decorative shape with a design according to a motif. A support member 4312 is attached to the upper left front end of the upper decorative member 4311. An upper edge lens member 4313 is provided on the front surface of the support member 4312 so as to be laterally continuous with the upper edge lens member 4118 of the lower movable body 4110 and the upper edge lens member 4214 of the left movable body 4210 when facing together. . The upper edge lens member 4313 has a convex portion (not shown) corresponding to the concave portion 4117A when combined with the lower movable body 4110, and when this convex portion fits into the concave portion 4117A, the upper end center of the lower movable body 4110 is positioned. The upper edge lens member 4313 is formed as a translucent decorative lens with a horizontally long wavy design based on a motif unified with the upper edge lens member 4118 and the like. As shown in FIG. 164, the upper edge lens member 4313 is formed in a bent shape so as to protrude forward from the bottom to the top. When assembled, the upper edge lens member 4313 receives the light from the LED 4114A of the lower movable body 4110 from the lower end including the convex portion corresponding to the concave portion 4117A, and irradiates the light forward while refracting and reflecting the light inside. It is supposed to be done. However, even if the lower movable body 4110 is in the appearance position, the light from the LED 4114A of the lower movable body 4110 does not enter the upper edge lens member 4313 when the right movable body 4310 is in the retracted position. An upper edge decorative member 4314 is attached to the lower part of the upper edge lens member 4313. The upper edge decorative member 4314 is formed into a decorative shape with a unified design with the front decorative member 4117 of the lower movable body 4110.

According to such a right movable body 4310, even if it appears so as to be combined with the lower movable body 4110 without a light emitting board, it receives light from the LED 4114A of the lower movable body 4110, and this light is transmitted to the upper edge lens member. Since the light is emitted forward through 4313, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts while increasing the lighting effect.

Furthermore, the light from the LED 4114A of the lower movable body 4110 is not only refracted and reflected through the upper edge lens member 4118 of the lower movable body 4110, but also irradiated forward by the upper edge lens member 4313 of the right movable body 4310. Since the light is irradiated forward while being refracted and reflected, it is possible to create a similar unified light emitting effect and increase the luminous efficiency of such a light emitting effect.

Note that in this embodiment, the left movable body 4210 is configured to have a light emitting substrate and emit light by itself like the lower movable body 4110; The left movable body 4210 may also be configured to receive light from the LED 4114A of the lower movable body 4110 and guide it forward.

[Second production unit]
165 is a perspective view showing the second presentation unit 5000, FIG. 166 is a front view showing the second presentation unit 5000, FIG. 167 is a top view showing the second presentation unit 5000, and FIG. 168 is a second presentation unit 169 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the vertical movement unit 5200 in the second production unit 5000, and FIG. 170 is a rear view showing the operation of the vertical movement unit 5200 in the second production unit 5000. FIG. 171 is a rear view for explaining the operation of the vertical movement unit 5200 in the second effect unit 5000.

As shown in FIGS. 165 to 168, the second performance unit 5000 includes a swing unit 5100 and a vertical movement unit 5200. The swing unit 5100 is provided at a predetermined position above the second presentation unit 5000 so as to be swingable around a horizontal axis in the left-right direction. The swing unit 5100 is arranged so as to be visible on the upper end side of the opening area 1d (see FIG. 138). The vertically moving unit 5200 is provided so as to be movable from a retracted position, which is behind the swinging unit 5100 and cannot be seen from the player, above the second performance unit 5000 to an appearance position below the swinging unit 5100. In this embodiment, the main feature is the vertical movement unit 5200, so the vertical movement unit 5200 will be described below.

[Structure and operation of vertical movement unit]
As shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, FIG. 170, and FIG. It is configured to include a pair of arm members 5250, 5251, a gear 5260, a motor 5270, a swing mechanism 5280, a front base member 5290, and a rear base member 5291. Note that in figures other than FIG. 167, the front base member 5290 and the rear base member 5291 are not shown for convenience.

In the vertical movement unit 5200, the front decorative member 5210 is formed as a transparent decorative lens with a design according to a motif, and is supported by the back member 5211 via a swinging mechanism 5280 provided on the back member 5211. (See FIGS. 168 and 171). A light emitting board and a light guide member (not shown) are provided on the back side of the front decoration member 5210. The front decoration member 5210 and the back member 5211 are integrally supported by the connection support member 5220, and are moved from a retracted position behind the swinging unit 5100 that is not visible to the player to an appearance position below the swinging unit 5100. It can be moved up and down.

As shown in FIGS. 168 and 171, the connection support member 5220 is connected to one side (left side) of the back member 5211 so as to cantilever support the back member 5211. The distal end portion 5221 of the connection support member 5220 is supported as a sliding portion so as to be movable in the vertical direction along the guide member 5230. Guide member 5230 is fixed to front base member 5290. One end 5240A of the spring member 5240 is locked to an appropriate portion of the connection support member 5220, and the other end 5240B is locked to an appropriate portion of the front base member 5290. The spring member 5240 plays a role of assisting the movement of the connection support member 5220 from below to above using elastic contraction force. The spring member 5240 is bent at a substantially right angle by contacting the pulley member 5241 fixed to the front base member 5290 at the side of the middle portion thereof, and the portion from one end 5240A to contacting the pulley member 5241 is a guide member. The pulley member 5241 is disposed along the direction in which the movement is guided by the pulley member 5230, that is, generally in the vertical direction, while the portion from the pulley member 5241 to the other end 5240A is disposed generally along the left-right direction. Accordingly, the spring member 5240 has a relatively large elastic limit and is long. As a result, the front decorative member 5210 and the back member 5211 as well as the connecting support member 5220 have a considerably large vertical movement stroke.

As shown in FIG. 171, the distal ends of the pair of left and right arm members 5250, 5251 are slidably connected to guide grooves 5211A, 5211B provided in the back member 5211. The base end portions of the arm members 5250 and 5251 are rotatably supported by the rear base member 5291 around a horizontal axis along the front-rear direction. The base end of one arm member 5250 is connected to a gear 5260 via a link member (not shown), and as the arm member 5250 rotates in conjunction with this gear 5260, it is integrated with the back member 5211 to the front surface. Decorative member 5210 moves in the vertical direction. Arm member 5250 receives the driving force of motor 5270 via gear 5260, and can rotate in both forward and reverse directions depending on the rotation direction of motor 5270. The gear 5260 and the motor 5270 are attached to the rear base member 5291.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168, when the gear 5260 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 168 while the front decorative member 5210 and the back member 5211 are in the retracted position behind the swing unit 5100, the state shown in FIG. As shown, the arm members 5250 and 5251 rotate downward, and the front decorative member 5210 and the back member 5211 move to the lower appearance position while being guided by the guide member 5230 via the connecting support member 5220. At this time, the upward elastic contraction force of the spring member 5240 increases as the spring member 5240 is displaced downward with respect to the connection support member 5220. However, even if the front decorative member 5210 and the back member 5211 are at the predetermined appearance position and the connecting support member 5220 is at the lowest position, the elastic contraction force of the spring member 5240 alone will not generate enough force to pull them up. However, only an auxiliary elastic contraction force acts upon the movement upward. Therefore, when the front decorative member 5210 and the back member 5211 are moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 171 to the state shown in FIG. 168 via the arm members 5250, 5251, an attempt is made to pull them back upward. A suitable elastic contraction force is supplementarily applied by the spring member 5240. Such a spring member 5240 is arranged in an empty space above the vertical movement unit 5200 so that a portion along the left and right direction is separated from the guide member 5230 and does not get in the way.

According to such a vertical movement unit 5200, the portion from the one end 5240A of the spring member 5240 to the pulley member 5241 is arranged so as to extend in the vertical direction for vertically moving the front decorative member 5210 and the back member 5211. , the portion from the other end 5240B of the spring member 5240 to the pulley member 5241 can be arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, which is different from the direction of vertical movement. Thereby, the movement stroke of the vertical movement unit 5200 can be made larger according to the length of the spring member 5240 for assisting vertical movement.

Furthermore, in the vertical movement unit 5200, the spring member 5240 can be placed in a bent position in an empty space that is not obstructed by component parts, so even a relatively long spring member 5240 can be placed in the vertical movement unit 5200 without any problem. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, the spring member 5240 is arranged in a posture in which it is bent and deformed in a portion along the vertical direction and a portion along the left and right directions by the pulley member 5241; For example, the spring member 5240 may be arranged in a posture in which it is bent and deformed from the up-down direction to the front-back direction.

[Game board]
172 is a front view showing the game board 1, FIGS. 173 and 174 are exploded perspective views showing the main parts of the game board 1, FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view showing the main parts of the game board 1, and FIG. 175 is an exploded perspective view showing the main parts of the game board 1. , FIG. 176 is a rear view showing the ball passage cover 7000 on the game board 1, FIG. 177 is a perspective view showing the opening/closing unit 8000 on the game board 1, and FIG. 178 is a perspective view showing the ball passage cover 7000 on the game board 1. , a perspective view for explaining the operation of the opening/closing unit 8000 on the game board 1, FIG. 179 is a partially cutaway perspective view for explaining the operation of the opening/closing unit 8000 on the game board 1, FIG. FIG. 8 is a partially cutaway top view for explaining the operation of the opening/closing unit 8000 in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 138 and 172, the game board 1 includes a ball launch passage 40, a stage 41, a first starting port 42, a second starting port 43, an opening/closing unit 8000 that opens and closes the second starting port 43, and a passage gate 44. , a first grand prize opening 45, a first grand prize opening shutter 45A that opens and closes the first grand prize opening 45, a second grand prize opening 46, a grand prize opening shutter 46A that opens and closes the second grand prize opening 46, and a plurality of general It includes a winning opening 47, an out opening 48, a ball passage cover 7000 (not shown in FIG. 172), and the like. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the game ball is inserted into the first starting hole 42, the second starting hole 43, the passage gate 44, the first big winning hole 45, the second big winning hole 46, and the general winning hole 47. By passing, a winning area is formed where prizes can be won. FIG. 172 shows a state in which the ball passage cover 7000 is removed.

The ball firing path 40 is arranged so as to extend from the left side toward the upper center of the game board 1, and is formed by a pair of outer and inner rails. The outer rail is arranged so as to surround the entire gaming area 1p. The inner rail is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1.

The stage 41 distributes the flow area of game balls in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the opening area 1d.

The game ball fired by the firing device 26 (not shown) changes its traveling direction and moves downwards on the game board 1 due to collisions with game nails (not shown) driven into the game board 1, the stage 41, etc. Flow down. In this process, game balls are collected when they win in any of the first starting hole 42, second starting hole 43, big winning hole 46, and general winning hole 47, and when they do not win or pass through. If the winnings are not won after passing through the gate 44, they are collected by being discharged from the outlet 48.

The first starting port 42 and the second starting port 43 provide an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that a game ball wins (passes), and also provide an opportunity for displaying the lottery results on a liquid crystal display device 4 (not shown), etc. It is something.

The first starting port 42 is provided in the center of the game board 1 at a generally lower position. When a game ball enters the first starting port 42, a preset number of game balls are paid out to an upper tray 17 or a lower tray 18 (not shown). The winning of a game ball into the first starting port 42 is detected by the first starting port switch 311 (see FIG. 21).

The second starting port 43 is provided at a position above the first starting port 42 on the right side of the game board 1. When a game ball enters the second starting port 43, a preset number of game balls are paid out to an upper tray 17 or a lower tray 18 (not shown). The second starting port 43 is opened and closed by the operation of an opening/closing unit 8000, which will be described later as a normal electric accessory. The winning of the game ball into the second starting port 43 is detected by the second starting port switch 312 (see FIGS. 21, 172, and 173).

The passage gate 44 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 43. The winning of a game ball to the passage gate 44 is detected by the passage gate switch 314 (see FIGS. 21, 172, and 173). Note that even if a game ball enters the passage gate 44, no prize ball is generated.

The first jackpot opening 45 is opened during a winning gaming state (such as a jackpot gaming state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. The first big prize opening 45 is provided at the upper right side of the gaming area 1p.

The first big winning hole 45 is provided with a first big winning hole shutter 45A for opening and closing it. The first big winning hole shutter 45A is configured to open and close the first big winning hole 45 by tilting in the front-back direction. Such a first jackpot opening 45 is opened during a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. The first big winning hole shutter 45A is driven to be openable and closable by the first big winning hole solenoid 315A (see FIG. 21). The winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 45 is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 315 (see FIG. 21).

The second big prize opening 46 is also opened during a winning gaming state (such as a jackpot gaming state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. The second big prize opening 46 is located at the lower right side of the gaming area 1p, and is provided above the right side of the first starting opening 42 and approximately below the left side of the second starting opening 43.

The second big prize opening 46 is an opening having a relatively large size in the left and right direction so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. The second big winning opening 46 is formed by a second big winning opening shutter 46A and a ball passage cover 7000 which will be described later. The second big prize opening 46 is provided at the lower right side of the gaming area 1p. The second big winning opening 46 is formed as an open opening between the front surface of the game board 1 and the ball passage cover 7000 when the second big winning opening shutter 46A is in the open state. When in the closed state, it becomes a closed mouth.

The second big prize opening shutter 46A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the second big prize opening 46. The widthwise dimension of the second large prize opening shutter 46A is about the diameter of the game ball. The second large prize opening shutter 46A is provided so as to be able to protrude and retract in the front and back direction of the game board 1. The second grand prize opening shutter 46A is in a closed state in which it closes the second grand prize opening 46 when it protrudes toward the front of the game board 1, and when it is retracted to the rear of the game board 1, it closes the second grand prize opening 46. It becomes an open state. The upper surface of the second big prize opening shutter 46A is a slope with a relatively gentle downward tendency to the left in the closed state. The second big winning opening shutter 46A is driven to be openable and closable by the second big winning opening solenoid 316A (see FIG. 21). The winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 46 is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 316 (see FIGS. 21, 172, and 173).

One or more general winning holes 47 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 47, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out although no lottery is held. The winning of a game ball into the general winning hole 47 is detected by the general winning hole switch 310 (see FIG. 21).

[Ball passage cover]
As shown in FIGS. 173 to 176, the ball passage cover 7000 forms ball passages T1 to T5 that guide game balls from the vicinity of the passing gate 44 through the second starting opening 43 to the second big prize opening 46. and are attached to the front of the game area 1p so as to face each other with a predetermined interval. The front surface of the ball passage cover 7000 is made of a transparent material, and the game balls passing through the ball passages T1 to T5 can be visually recognized from the front. A plurality of ribs 7100, 7110, 7120, 7130, 7140, a plurality of convex portions 7200, a first deceleration portion 7300, and a second deceleration portion 7310 are formed on the back surface of the ball passage cover 7000.

As shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, in the ball path cover 7000, the ball path T1 is a vertically long shape that guides the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 44 or the game balls that have deviated from the passage gate 44 to fall downward. It is a passage (vertical passage) and is formed by the front surface of the game board 1, the peripheral wall of the opening area 1d, and the rib 7100. A rib 7110 is formed below the ball passage T1. The game ball that has fallen through the ball path T1 hits a contact portion 7110A formed in a substantially horizontal shape in the rib 7110. On the left side of the contact part 7110A, an open discharge part 7110B is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the second starting port 43 beyond the contact part 7110A. In addition, the contact portion 7110A is provided with a first ball that is tilted toward the front surface of the game area 1p so as to once bounce the game ball that has fallen through the ball path T1 toward the front surface of the game area 1p. A deceleration section 7300 is formed. When the game ball that has fallen through the ball path T1 hits the first deceleration section 7300, the rolling speed toward the discharge section 7110B is reduced without immediately bouncing back toward the discharge section 7110B. Thereby, the game ball released from the release part 7110B via the ball path T1 slowly heads toward the second starting port 43 at a relatively slow rolling speed.

Next, in the ball passage cover 7000, the ball passage T2 allows the game ball ejected from the ejection part 7110B to be placed above the second starting opening 43 when the opening/closing unit 8000, which will be described later, closes the second starting opening 43. This is a slightly downwardly sloping passageway leading further to the left side while passing through the inside of the opening/closing unit 8000, and is mainly formed by the opening/closing unit 8000. This ball passage T2 will be described later together with the explanation of the opening/closing unit 8000.

Next, in the ball path cover 7000, the ball path T3 is a path through which the game ball that has passed through the ball path T2 falls further on the left side thereof, and is formed by the front surface of the game board 1 and the ribs 7120, 7130. The rib 7120 is close to the left side of the second starting port 43. The rib 7130 is formed below the rib 7120 and has a stepped portion 7130A having a height difference from the rib 7120. Further to the left side of the stepped portion 7130A, the second big prize opening 46 is located. The game ball that has fallen through the ball path T3 hits the stepped portion 7130A of the rib 7130. Also in this stepped portion 7130A, the second deceleration portion 7310 is tilted toward the front surface of the game area 1p so that the game ball that has fallen through the ball path T3 is once bounced back toward the front surface of the game area 1p. is formed. The game ball that has fallen through the ball path T3 hits the second deceleration part 7310, so that the rolling speed toward the second major prize opening 46 is reduced without immediately bouncing back toward the second major prize opening 46. It will be done. Thereby, the game ball heading towards the second big prize opening 46 via the ball path T3 can also be rolled at a relatively slow rolling speed. Further, a convex portion 7200 is formed on the back surface portion of the ball path cover 7000 along the ball path T3. The rolling speed of the game ball when passing through the ball path T3 is also reduced by hitting the convex portion 7200. Therefore, the game ball heading toward the second big winning hole 46 is guided to the second big winning hole 46 at a relatively slow rolling speed.

Next, in the ball passage cover 7000, the ball passage T4 is connected to the upper surface of the second big winning opening shutter 46A when the second big winning opening 46 is closed by the second big winning opening shutter 46A (not shown). It is a slightly downward-left passage that guides the game ball further to the left along the same line, and is formed by the second big prize opening shutter 46A and the back surface of the ball passage cover 7000. A convex portion 7200 is also formed on the back surface portion of the ball path cover 7000 along the ball path T4. Thereby, the rolling speed of the game ball when passing through the ball path T4 is reduced by hitting the convex portion 7200. As a result, a plurality of game balls will roll on the second grand prize opening shutter 46A while staying stagnant, and at that time, when the second grand prize opening shutter 46A is opened, a plurality of game balls will be rolled on the second grand prize opening shutter 46A at once. A large number of winning balls are expected by falling simultaneously from the two big winning holes 46.

Next, the ball path T5 is a path through which the game ball that has passed through the ball path T4 falls further on the left side thereof, and is formed by the front surface of the game board 1 and the rib 7140. The rib 7140 is close to the left side of the second big prize opening 46. The game balls that have fallen through the ball path T5 are mainly guided to an out port 48 (not shown).

[Opening/closing unit]
As shown in FIGS. 177 to 180, the opening/closing unit 8000 includes a main body member 8100, a rear cover member 8200, a blade member 8300, and a blade member solenoid 313 (not shown) as basic components. Ru.

A U-shaped ball passage T2 is formed inside the main body member 8100 and the rear cover member 8200 (see FIGS. 179 and 180). An entrance portion 8110 is formed on the front right side of the main body member 8100 for guiding the game balls rolling from the discharge portion 7110B (see FIGS. 175 and 176) into the inside, and an entrance portion 8110 is formed on the front left side of the main body member 8100. An exit portion 8120 is formed in the game ball for guiding game balls rolling inside the game ball to the outside. A partition portion 8130 is formed inside the main body member 8100 to partition the inlet portion 8110 and the outlet portion 8120 to form a U-shaped spherical passage T2.

The rear cover member 8200 is attached to the rear part of the main body member 8100, and forms an internal space between it and the partition portion 8130 of the main body member 8100 through which game balls can pass. The inner wall of the rear cover member 8200 is provided with concave curved portions 8210, 8211 for smoothly bending the game balls rolling along the U-shaped ball path T2.

The blade member 8300 is a movable component that forms the bottom surface of the ball passage T2 from the second starting port 43 to the inside of the main body member 8100 and the rear cover member 8200. The blade member 8300 is driven to protrude and retreat in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 by a blade member solenoid 313 (see FIG. 21), not shown. The blade member 8300 closes the second starting port 43 when it is protruded forward, and opens the second starting port 43 when it is retracted backward. The blade member 8300 is formed in a stepped shape such that the front portion 8310 that closes the second starting port 43 is lowered from the right side to the left side. As a result, when the blade member 8300 closes the second starting port 43, the game ball that enters the inside of the main body member 8100 and the rear cover member 8200 from the entrance portion 8110 and is guided along the ball path T2. If so, some game balls may directly pass through the front portion 8310 of the blade member 8300 without entering the entrance portion 8110 and roll from the right side to the left side. Regardless of whether the blade member 8300 closes or opens the second starting port 43, the rear portion 8320 of the blade member 8300 contacts the bottom surface of the ball passage T2 inside the main body member 8100 and the rear cover member 8200. is formed. In this rear portion 8320, a portion extending from the rear of the inlet portion 8110 to the portion continuing to the rear of the outlet portion 8120 is a continuous sloped surface that is lower along the traveling direction of the ball passage T2. Thereby, when the blade member 8300 closes the second starting port 43, a plurality of game balls are smoothly guided from the inlet portion 8110 to the outlet portion 8120 along the ball path T2. Further, when the blade member 8300 opens the second starting port 43, the plurality of game balls staying on the rear part 8320 of the blade member 8300 are smoothly discharged from the exit part 8120, and the second starting port 43 is opened. It will fall below the starting port 43 and win a prize. The winning of the game ball into the second starting port 43 is detected by the second starting port switch 312 (see FIGS. 21, 172, and 173).

As shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the game ball just before entering the ball path T2 falls through the ball path T1 and then immediately bounces back toward the second starting port 43 by hitting the first deceleration part 7300. Without this, the rolling speed toward the second starting port 43 is reduced. Thereby, the game ball heading toward the second starting port 43 immediately before entering the ball path T2 can be rolled at a relatively slow rolling speed. As a result, a plurality of game balls will roll on the blade member 8300 while remaining stagnant along the ball path T2, and if the blade member 8300 is in the open state at that time, a plurality of game balls will start the second start at once. By falling simultaneously from the mouth 43, a large number of winning balls can be expected.

According to such a game board 1, when a game ball that has fallen along the ball path T1 serving as a vertical path hits the contact portion 7110A and is ejected leftward from the ejection portion 7110B, the first deceleration portion 7300, the game ball is guided to the first starting port 43 and the blade member 8300 located to the left while the advancing speed of the game ball is reduced. Furthermore, the game ball that has fallen to the stepped portion 7130A via the first starting port 43 and the blade member 8300 is slowed down by the second deceleration portion 7310, and is closed to the second grand prize opening 46 and the second grand prize opening shutter. You will be guided to 46A. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rebound of the game ball and smoothly guide the game ball from the discharge part 7110B through the first starting port 43 and the blade member 8300 to the second grand prize opening 46 and the second grand prize opening shutter 46A. , it is possible to sufficiently decelerate and guide a plurality of game balls continuously even to a plurality of consecutive winning areas, and furthermore, the blade member 8300 near the discharge part 7110B, the second starting opening 43, and the second big winning opening 46 A large number of winning balls can be expected while preventing ball chewing and ball clogging of the game balls on the top and the second big prize opening shutter 46A.

“Fifth embodiment”
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to the drawings. Incidentally, the same or similar components as those according to the first to fourth embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals and the explanation thereof will be omitted. 181 to 221 are diagrams for explaining a pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. Note that in FIGS. 181 to 221, illustrations of parts are omitted as appropriate for convenience.

The pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment mainly includes a protective cover 1q for preventing short circuits of various sensors provided on the game board 1 in the main body subunit 600, an electric unit 7500 which is an example of a ball passage structure, and various It is characterized by a production unit 610 that performs production. These characteristic structures will be explained in order below with reference to the drawings.

[Structure of main unit subunit]
181 is a front view showing the main body subunit 600, FIG. 182 is a front perspective view showing the main body subunit 600, FIG. 183 is a rear perspective view showing the main body subunit 600, and FIG. 184 is a front view showing the main body subunit 600. FIG.

In the main body sub-unit 600 of this embodiment, the game board 1, the liquid crystal display device 4, the effect unit 610 described below, etc. are integrally attached to the mounting frame 410 (see FIGS. 43 and 44) of the main body unit 400 (not shown). It is for the purpose of As shown in FIG. 184, the main body subunit 600 includes a game board 1, a production unit 610, and a rear base 620, which are arranged in order from the front side to the rear side.

The rear base 620 is formed into a substantially rectangular box shape with the display area 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4 disposed on the front side. As shown in FIG. 183, the rear base 620 has a main control board accommodating part 621 in which the main control board 28 is housed on the left side of the rear side, and a sub control board 33 on the right side of the rear side. A sub-control board accommodating part 622 and a relay board accommodating part 623 in which the relay board 32 is accommodated at the lower part of the rear side are provided.

As will be described in detail later, in such a main body subunit 600, the production unit 610 can be moved from an open state to a closed state. FIG. 181 shows the main body sub-unit 600 with the effect unit 610 in the open state. When the effect unit 610 is in the open state, the main body sub-unit 600 has a liquid crystal display disposed approximately in the center on the rear side of the effect unit 610. A liquid crystal visible area 1d is formed in which a display area 4d of the device 4 is visible.

[Game board]
FIG. 185 is a front view showing the game board 1.
In the game board 1 according to the fifth embodiment, a liquid crystal visible area 1d is formed to expose the display area 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the front, and a game ball is rolled around the outer periphery of this liquid crystal visible area 1d. A movable game area 1p is formed. The game area 1p of the game board 1 includes a ball launch passage 40, a stage 41, a first starting port 42, a passing gate 44, a second starting port, a big winning port, a big winning port shutter that opens and closes the big winning port, and game balls. An electric unit 7500 provided with a ball path for guiding the ball, a plurality of general winning openings 47, an out opening 48, etc. are arranged. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, it is possible to win a prize by passing the game ball through the first starting port 42, the second starting port, the passage gate 44, the first big winning port, the second big winning port, and the general winning port 47. A winning area is formed.

The ball firing path 40 is arranged so as to extend from the left side toward the game area 1p where the game balls roll toward the upper center, and is formed by a pair of outer rails and inner rails. The outer rail is arranged so as to surround the entire gaming area 1p. The inner rail is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1.

The stage 41 distributes the flow area of game balls in the game area 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge of the liquid crystal visible area 1d.

A game ball fired by a firing device 26 (not shown) flows downward toward the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to collision with the game nail 1pa driven into the game board 1, the stage 41, etc. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning any of the first starting hole 42, second starting hole 43, big winning hole, and general winning hole 47, and when they do not win, or when they pass through the gate. 44 and if no prize is won after that, it is discharged from the outlet 48 and collected.

The first starting port 42 and the second starting port 43, which will be described later, provide an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that a game ball wins (passes), and an opportunity for displaying the lottery results on a liquid crystal display device 4 (not shown), etc. It gives

The first starting port 42 is provided in the center of the game board 1 at a generally lower position. When a game ball enters the first starting port 42, a preset number of game balls are paid out to an upper tray 17 or a lower tray 18 (not shown). The winning of a game ball into the first starting port 42 is detected by the first starting port switch 311 (see FIG. 21).

The passage gate 44 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 43. The winning of a game ball into the passage gate 44 is detected by the passage gate switch 314 (see FIG. 21).

One or more general winning holes 47 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 47, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out although no lottery is held. The winning of a game ball into the general winning hole 47 is detected by the general winning hole switch 310 (see FIG. 21).

186 is an enlarged front perspective view of the vicinity of the passage gate 44, FIG. 187 is an enlarged exploded perspective view of the vicinity of the passage gate 44, and FIG. 188 is an enlarged rear perspective view of the vicinity of the passage gate 44.
Regarding the structure of attaching electronic components such as various switches provided in the first starting port 42, the second starting port 43, the big prize opening, the passing gate 44, the general winning opening 47, etc. to the game board 1, the passing gate 44 is used as an example. Explain.

The passage gate switch 314 provided in the passage gate 44 has a sensor 314a arranged on the front side of the game board 1 (game area 1p) to detect passage of a game ball, and a switch hole that penetrates the game board 1 in the front-rear direction. A connector 314b, which is a wiring connection part connected to the sensor 314a and connected to the wiring, protrudes from the rear surface 1b side of the game board 1 from 1pb, and the sensor 314a detects the signal through the wiring connected to the connector 314b. The signal is output to the main control board 28 (see FIG. 21).

Such a passage gate switch 314 is an example of an electronic component having a wiring connection portion connected to wiring on the back side of the game board.

Here, the game nail 1pa is an example of a game component that is formed in the shape of a metal nail and can change the rolling direction of the game ball, and the tip side protrudes to the front side of the game board 1 (game area 1p). The base end side is a through hole that penetrates the game board 1 in the front-back direction, and the game nail 1pa is driven into the nail hole 1pc for disposing the game board 1. Such a game nail 1pa is charged with static electricity when it comes into contact with a game ball flowing down the game area 1p.

As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 188, the static electricity charged on the game nail 1pa passes through the nail hole 1pc on the back surface 1b of the game board 1, and passes through the switch hole located nearby (in the example shown in FIG. 188, the switch A short circuit is made to the connector of the switch (connector 314b in the example shown in FIG. 188) that protrudes rearward from the hole 1pb).

FIG. 189 is a partial cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the passage gate 44.
A protective cover 1c is provided on the back side 1b of the game board 1 as a means for separating the connector (in the example shown in FIG. 189, the connector 314b) and the game nail 1pa to maintain a creepage distance. The protective cover 1c is in close contact with the back surface 1b of the game board 1, covers the switch hole 1pb of the game board 1, and has a base portion 1ca through which a switch connector (connector 314b in the example shown in FIG. 188) passes, and a base portion. 1ca and a wall portion 1cb formed in a cylindrical shape. It is desirable that the base portion 1ca is formed to have a larger area than the opening area of each switch hole. The wall portion 1cb penetrates the base portion 1ca of the connector (in the example shown in FIG. 188, the connector 314b) and extends from the tip of the portion protruding rearward from the back surface 1b of the game board 1 to a position away from the back surface 1b. It is desirable to be present. With such a protective cover 1c, the creepage distance between the connector (in the example shown in FIG. 189, the connector 314b) and the game nail 1pa is increased compared to the state where the protective cover 1c is not provided (for example, the state shown in FIG. 188). becomes possible.

In this way, on the rear surface 1b side of the game board 1, the creepage distance between the wiring connection part (for example, the connector 314b, etc.) of the electronic component (for example, the passage gate switch 314, etc.) and the game component (for example, the game nail 1pa, etc.) Since the protective cover 1c is provided to remove the static electricity, it is possible to increase the creepage distance between the static electricity-charged game parts and the wiring connection part of the electric parts, so that the static electricity charged on the game parts can be prevented from short-circuiting to the electric parts. This makes it possible to prevent
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent static electricity charged in gaming components from short-circuiting to electronic components.

(Electric unit)
The electric unit 7500 is provided below the passage gate 44 on the right side when looking at the game board 1 from the front, and has a ball passage formed inside, and a first prize opening, a second starting opening, and a ball passage. , a second grand prize opening is provided.
190 is a front exploded perspective view of the power unit 7500, FIG. 191 is a rear exploded perspective view of the power unit 7500, and FIG. 192 is a rear view of the ball passage cover 7520.

The electric unit 7500 includes a unit body 7510 fixed to the game board 1, a ball passage cover 7520 arranged in front of the unit body 7510 and forming a ball passage, and a ball passage cover 7520 affixed to the front surface of the ball passage cover 7520. A decorative sheet 7530. As shown in FIG. 192, game balls flow into the electric unit 7500 from the upper right side, flow down toward the left side, and flow from the upstream side to the downstream side in the path of the game balls. A first big winning hole 45, a second starting hole 43, and a second big winning hole 46 are provided in this order.

The unit main body part 7510 includes a first big winning opening shutter 45A that opens and closes the first big winning opening 45, an opening/closing unit 8000 that opens and closes the second starting opening 43, and a second big winning opening that opens and closes the second big winning opening 46. A prize opening shutter 46A is provided. In addition, the unit main body part 7510 includes a first grand prize opening count switch 315 that detects winning of a game ball to the first big winning opening 45, and a second big winning hole count switch 315 that detects winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 43. A starting port switch 312 and a second large winning hole count switch 316 that detects winning of a game ball to the second large winning hole 46 are provided.

The first big winning opening shutter 45A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the first big winning opening 45. The widthwise dimension of the first large prize opening shutter 45A is approximately the diameter of the game ball. The first big prize opening shutter 45A is provided so as to be able to protrude and retract in the front and back direction of the game board 1. The first big prize opening shutter 45A is in a closed state in which it closes the first big prize opening 45 when it is protruded to the front of the game board 1, and when it is retracted to the rear of the game board 1, it closes the first big winning opening 45. It becomes an open state. The upper surface of the first big prize opening shutter 45A is a slope with a relatively gentle downward tendency to the left in the closed state. The first big winning hole shutter 45A is driven to be openable and closable by the first big winning hole solenoid 315A (see FIG. 21). The winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 45 is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 315.

The opening/closing unit 8000 has the same configuration as described in the fourth embodiment, and is configured to open/close the second starting port 43 by driving the blade member 8300 to protrude/retract in the front-rear direction. The blade member 8300 is driven by the blade member solenoid 313 (see FIG. 21) to open and close the second starting port 43. The winning of the game ball into the second starting port 43 is detected by the second starting port switch 312.

The second big prize opening shutter 46A is a plate-like member having a relatively large longitudinal dimension along the left-right direction so as to cover the second big prize opening 46. The widthwise dimension of the second large prize opening shutter 46A is about the diameter of the game ball. The second large prize opening shutter 46A is provided so as to be able to protrude and retract in the front and back direction of the game board 1. The second grand prize opening shutter 46A is in a closed state in which it closes the second grand prize opening 46 when it protrudes toward the front of the game board 1, and when it is retracted to the rear of the game board 1, it closes the second grand prize opening 46. It becomes an open state. The upper surface of the second big prize opening shutter 46A is a slope with a relatively gentle downward tendency to the left in the closed state. The second big winning opening shutter 46A is driven to be openable and closable by the second big winning opening solenoid 316A (see FIG. 21). The winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 46 is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 316.

The ball passage cover 7520, on the back side (rear side) of the front panel 7520a as a surface part, allows the game balls that have flowed into the electric unit 7500 to pass through the first prize opening 45 and the second starting opening, as shown in FIG. 192. 43, it forms ball passages T1 to T6 leading in order to the second big prize opening 46. The front panel 7520a as the surface part of the ball passage cover 7520 is made of a transparent material, and allows the game balls passing through the ball passages T1 to T5 to be viewed from the front. When the first big winning opening 45 is closed by the first big winning opening shutter 45A (not shown), the ball passage T1 guides the game ball to the left side along the upper surface of the first big winning opening shutter 45A. It is a passage slightly downward to the left, and is formed by the first big prize opening shutter 45A and the back surface of the ball passage cover 7520. The ball path T2 is a path in which the game balls that have passed through the ball path T1 are further dropped on the left side thereof. The ball path T3 allows the game ball that has fallen down the ball path T2 to be passed through the opening and closing unit 8000 from above the second starting port 43 when the blade member 8300 of the opening/closing unit 8000 (not shown) closes the second starting port 43. It is a slightly downward-sloping passage that leads further to the left while passing through the interior. The ball path T4 is a path in which the game balls that have passed through the ball path T3 are further dropped on the left side thereof. The ball passage T5 moves the game ball further to the left side along the upper surface of the second big winning opening shutter 46A when the second big winning opening 46 is closed by the second big winning opening shutter 46A (not shown). It is a passage leading downward slightly to the left, and is formed by the second big prize opening shutter 46A and the back surface of the ball passage cover 7520. The ball path T6 is a path through which the game balls that have passed through the ball path T5 further fall on the left side thereof and are discharged to the outside of the electric unit 7500.

In addition, the ball passage cover 7520 is formed below the first big winning hole 45, and is a guiding ball that guides the game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 45 to the first big winning hole count switch 315 (see FIG. 190). a passage 7521, a guiding ball passage 7522 formed below the second starting port 43 and guiding the game ball that has entered the second starting port 43 to the second starting port switch 312 (see FIG. 190), and a second big winning prize. It is provided with a guiding ball passage 7523 formed below the opening 46 and guiding the game balls that have entered the second big winning opening 46 to the second big winning opening count switch 316 (see FIG. 21).

The guiding ball passage 7521 includes a wall part 7521a extending downward substantially perpendicularly from the right end of the first big prize opening 45 (the upstream end of the ball passage T1), and a curved part 7521b having one end connected to the wall part 7521a and curved. It is provided with a sloped part 7521c that continues to the other end of the curved part 7521b and slopes downward toward the first big winning opening count switch 315.

The guide ball passage 7522 includes a wall part 7522a extending substantially vertically downward from the right end of the second starting port 43 (the upstream end of the ball passage T3), a curved part 7522b whose one end is connected to the wall part 7522a, and a curved part 7522b. An inclined portion 7522c is connected to the other end of the portion 7522b and slopes downward toward the second starting port switch 312.

The guiding ball passage 7523 includes a wall part 7523a extending downward substantially perpendicularly from the right end of the second big prize opening 46 (the upstream end of the ball passage T5), and a first inclined part having one end connected to the wall part 7523a and sloping downward. 7523b, and a second sloped part 7523c that is connected to the other end of the first sloped part 7523b and slopes downward toward the second big prize opening count switch 316 with a gentler slope than the first sloped part 7523b.

Further, the ball passage cover 7520 is provided with a hole 7525 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the ball passage on the front panel 7520a. The holes 7525 are located near the starting point of the wall 7521a of the guiding ball passage 7521 and near the ending point of the inclined part 7521c, near the starting point of the wall 7522a of the guiding ball passage 7522 and near the ending point of the inclined part 7522c, and near the ending point of the inclined part 7522c of the guiding ball passage 7523. It is provided near the starting point of the wall portion 7523a and at an intermediate portion of the second slope portion 7523c. In other words, the hole 7525 has a possibility that the game ball will come into contact with the vicinity of the part where the ball path becomes a step or with the movable members (the first big winning opening shutter 45A, the blade member 8300, the second big winning opening shutter 46A). It is provided at a certain position or in a part where there is a risk that the falling speed of the game ball may decrease.

As shown in FIG. 190, the decorative sheet 7530 has a pattern printed thereon, is transparent, has approximately the same shape as the front panel 7520a of the ball passage cover 7520, and corresponds to the hole 7525 of the ball passage cover 7520. A hole 7535 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position where That is, with the decorative sheet 7530 attached to the front side of the front panel 7520a, the holes 7525 and 7535 are in communication with each other.
Therefore, in the assembly work of attaching the decorative sheet 7530 to the front panel 7520a of the ball passage cover 7520, by aligning the hole 7535 of the decorative sheet 7530 with the upright position corresponding to the hole 7525 of the ball passage cover 7520, the process can be easily performed. It is possible to specify the attachment position of the decorative sheet 7530, and the assembly work can be performed efficiently.

Next, a method for eliminating ball clogging occurring within the ball passage cover 7520 will be described.
193 and 194 are diagrams illustrating a method for eliminating ball clogging in the ball passage cover 7520. In the example shown in FIG. 193, near the end of the slope 7522c, game balls are piled up between the end of the slope 7522c and the wall facing this end, resulting in a ball jam. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 194, by inserting the rod-shaped body R into the hole 7525 and the hole 7535 provided near the end point of the inclined part 7522c, and breaking the stacked game balls with the rod-shaped body R, Ball clogging will be resolved.
With the above configuration, it is possible to provide a power unit that can both improve the efficiency of assembly work and provide a means for eliminating ball clogging.

[Direction unit]
FIG. 195 is an exploded perspective view of the production unit 610.
The production unit 610 includes a cover member 6100 formed in a box shape with an open front side, a shutter unit 6200 disposed inside the cover member 6100, a launch unit 6300 disposed in front of the shutter unit 6200, and a launch unit 6300 disposed in the front side of the shutter unit 6200. A logo unit 6400 disposed on the front side of the unit 6300.

The cover member 6100 has an opening 6111 formed in the center of the back plate 6610. The opening 6111 is provided at a position corresponding to the display area 4d (see FIG. 184) of the liquid crystal display device 4 provided on the rear base 620.

(Shutter unit)
FIG. 196 is a front exploded perspective view of the shutter unit 6200, and FIG. 197 is a rear exploded perspective view of the shutter unit 6200.
The shutter unit 6200 includes a fixing section 6210, a substrate 6220, a left shutter unit 6230, a right shutter unit 6240, a middle shutter unit 6250, and a cover section 6260.

The fixing part 6210 is arranged on the upper part and fixed to the cover member 6100. The fixing part 6210 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an open bottom, and is arranged around the opening 6111 when attached to the cover member 6100.

The substrate 6220 is arranged approximately at the front center of the fixing part 6210. The board 6220 is provided with electronic components such as a first detection means 6221a and a second detection means 6221b (described later) for detecting the positions of the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240, and connectors for connecting external wiring. It is being
The cover part 6260 is disposed on the front side of the substrate 6220 and covers the substrate 6220.

The left shutter unit 6230 has an outer shape obtained by dividing a donut shape having an inner periphery and an outer periphery when viewed from the front. The left shutter unit 6230 is disposed on the left side of the fixed part 6210 as a first position, and is supported by the fixed part 6210 so as to be slidable from the upper left toward the lower right to a second position. Such a left shutter unit 6230 is an example of a movable body that can move from the first position to the second position.

The right shutter unit 6240 has an outer shape obtained by dividing a donut shape having an inner periphery and an outer periphery when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to the left shutter unit 6230. The right shutter unit 6240 is disposed on the right side of the fixed part 6210 as a first position, and is supported by the fixed part 6210 so as to be slidable from the upper right to the lower left to a second position. The first positions of the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 are positions where they overlap with the fixing part 6210 and do not overlap with the opening 6111 when attached to the cover member 6100. Further, the second position of the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 is a position where they overlap with the opening 6111 when they are attached to the cover member 6100. Such a right shutter unit 6240 is an example of a movable body that can move from the first position to the second position. In the following description, the "first position" of the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 will be described as the position in the open state, which will be described later, and the "second position" will be described as the position in the closed state. The "first position" may be the position in the closed state, and the "second position" may be the position in the open state.

198 is a front view showing the shutter unit 6200 in the open state, FIG. 199 is a front view showing the shutter unit 6200 in the closed state, FIG. 200 is a rear view showing the shutter unit 6200 in the open state, and FIG. 201 is the closed state of the shutter unit 6200. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the state.

The fixing part 6210 includes an upper member 6210A extending in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a pair of holding members 6210B extending downward from the left and right ends of the upper member 6210A, respectively. The upper member 6210A includes two motors 6211 driven by the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21), and a transmission section 6212 that transmits the rotational force of the two motors 6211 to the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240, respectively. and are provided. Further, the pair of holding members 6210B can hold a frame portion 6251 of a middle shutter unit 6250, which will be described later, while moving it. One holding member 6210B is provided with a motor 6211 that is driven under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21) and a transmission section 6212 that transmits the rotational force of the motor 6211 to the middle shutter unit 6250. The transmission section 6212 is composed of one or more rotating gears. Further, guide portions 6213 formed by grooves extending along the moving direction of the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 are formed in the upper member 6210A at positions corresponding to the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240. ing. Further, the pair of holding members 6210B are each formed with a vertical guide portion 6214, which is a shaft extending in the vertical direction. The motor 6211 and the transmission section 6212 are an example of a driving means for driving the movable body.

The left shutter unit 6230 includes a base portion 6231, a rack portion 6232, and a decorative portion 6233. The base portion 6231 includes a pulley 6231a on the rear surface that slidably engages with the guide portion 6213. The rack part 6232 is fixed to the rear surface of the base part 6231, and a gear that meshes with the transmission part 6212 is formed on the side surface. The decorative part 6233 is fixed to the front surface of the base part 6231 and has an outer shape obtained by dividing a donut shape having an inner periphery and an outer periphery, and a lens member formed in a predetermined shape is placed on the front surface, and a , LEDs that emit light under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21) are arranged.

The right shutter unit 6240 includes a base portion 6241, a rack portion 6242, and a decorative portion 6243. The base portion 6241 includes a pulley 6241a on the rear surface that slidably engages with the guide portion 6213. The rack part 6242 is fixed to the rear surface of the base part 6241, and a gear that meshes with the transmission part 6212 is formed on the side surface. The decorative part 6243 is fixed to the front surface of the base part 6241 and has an outer shape obtained by dividing a donut shape having an inner periphery and an outer periphery. A lens member formed in a predetermined shape is disposed on the frontmost surface, and a lens member formed in a predetermined shape is disposed on the front surface. , LEDs that emit light under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21) are arranged.

The middle shutter unit 6250 includes a frame portion 6251 formed in a substantially U-shape with an open upper part, and a decorative portion 6253 arranged approximately in the center of the frame portion 6251 and formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front. and. The middle shutter unit 6250 has left and right end portions of a frame portion 6251 extending in the vertical direction, and is held by a holding member 6210B so as to be slidable from below to above. At the left and right ends of the frame portion 6251, engaging portions 6251a are provided that slidably engage with the upper and lower guide portions 6214 of the holding member 6210B. Furthermore, a rack portion 6251b is provided at the right end portion of the frame portion 6251. A rack portion 6251b is provided with a gear that meshes with the transmission portion 6212 of the holding member 6210B. The decorative part 6253 is fixed on the center part of the frame part 6251 and has a substantially circular outer shape, and a lens member formed in a predetermined shape is disposed at the forefront. (See FIG. 21) LEDs that emit light are arranged.

Next, the operation of shutter unit 6200 will be explained.
In the open state shown in FIGS. 198 and 200, the shutter unit 6200 has the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 in the first position, and the middle shutter unit 6250 in the lower position. In the open state of the shutter unit 6200, the central portion (the portion overlapping with the opening 6111 of the cover member 6100 shown in FIG. 195) is open, and the display area 4d of the liquid crystal display device 4 disposed on the rear side of the shutter unit 6200 is open. (See FIG. 184) is visible from the front side.

The shutter unit 6200 changes from the open state shown in FIGS. 198 and 200 to the closed state shown in FIGS. 199 and 201 by being driven under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21). When the shutter unit 6200 is in the closed state, the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 are arranged at the second position, and the middle shutter unit 6250 is arranged above. When the shutter unit 6200 is in the closed state, the inner periphery of the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 and the outer periphery of the middle shutter unit 6250 are close to or in contact with each other. In the closed state of the shutter unit 6200, the central portion (the portion that overlaps with the opening 6111 of the cover member 6100 shown in FIG. 195) is covered by the left shutter unit 6230, the right shutter unit 6240, and the middle shutter unit 6250, and the shutter unit A display area 4d (see FIG. 184) of the liquid crystal display device 4 disposed on the rear side of the display device 6200 is not visible from the front side.

Next, a configuration for detecting the states of the left shutter unit 6230 and the right shutter unit 6240 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the fixed portion 6210 is provided with open state guide means 6215 and closed state guide means 6216 that protrude from the front surface of the back plate 6210a to the front side. The substrate 6220 includes a first detection means 6221a, which is a sensor that transmits a signal when the left shutter unit 6230 or the right shutter unit 6240 is in an open state, and the left shutter unit 6230. Alternatively, a second detection means 6221b, which is a sensor that transmits a signal when the right shutter unit 6240 is in a closed state, is provided. Further, on the substrate 6220, between the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b, a first engagement part 6222 that engages with the open state guide means 6215 and a first engagement part 6222 that engages with the closed state guide means 6216 are provided. 2 engaging portions 6223 are formed. The left shutter unit 6230 is provided with a detection piece 6234 that projects rearward. The right shutter unit 6240 is provided with a detection piece 6244 that projects rearward.

Open state guide means 6215 and closed state guide means 6216 provided on the fixed part 6210, first detection means 6221a, second detection means 6221b, first engagement part 6222 and second engagement part provided on the board 6220. 6223 are provided at positions corresponding to the detection piece 6234 of the left shutter unit 6230 and the detection piece 6244 of the right shutter unit 6240, respectively.

FIG. 202 is an enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the structure for detecting the open state of the shutter unit 6200, and FIG. 203 is an enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the structure for detecting the closed state of the shutter unit 6200. 202 and 203 show a state in which the cover portion 6260 (see FIG. 196) is removed. Further, FIG. 204 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for detecting the state of the shutter unit 6200. In the following description, the configuration for detecting the state of the left shutter unit 6230 will be mainly explained. However, the right shutter unit 6240 differs from the left shutter unit 6230 in that it is configured symmetrically and operates laterally. The same is true.

The open state guide means 6215 is provided on a fixed part 6210 that is separate from the substrate 6220 on which the first detection means 6221a is provided, and when the left shutter unit 6230 moves from the second position to the first position ( When moving from the closed state to the open state), the sensing piece 6234 is guided to the first sensing means 6221a.

The closed state guide means 6216 is provided on a fixed part 6210 that is separate from the substrate 6220 on which the second detection means 6221b is provided, and when the left shutter unit 6230 moves from the first position to the second position ( When moving from the open state to the closed state), the detection piece 6234 is guided to the second detection means 6221b.

In the open state guide means 6215 and the closed state guide means 6216, a groove 6218 into which a detection piece 6234 is inserted is formed in a protrusion 6217 that protrudes from the front surface of the back plate 6210a to the front side. As shown in FIG. 204, the groove 6218 of the open state guide means 6215 is formed on the movement path of the detection piece 6234, has a width slightly wider than the thickness of the detection piece 6234, and has a uniform width extending along the movement path. The guide portion 6218b is provided with a portion 6218a and a guide portion 6218b that becomes narrower from a wide state as the left shutter unit 6230 goes from a closed state to an open state and continues to the equal width portion 6218a. Further, the groove portion 6218 of the closed state guide means 6216 is formed on the movement path of the detection piece 6234, has a width slightly wider than the thickness of the detection piece 6234, and has an equal width portion 6218a extending along the movement path, and a left As the shutter unit 6230 goes from the open position to the closed position, the width changes from a wide state to a narrow state, and includes a guide portion 6218b that continues to the equal width portion 6218a. Further, the groove portion 6218 is formed in the open state guiding means 6215 and the closed state guiding means 6216 more than the groove portion formed on the end side far from the first detecting means 6221a and the second detecting means 6221b in the open state guiding means 6215 and the closed state guiding means 6216. The grooves formed at the ends of the guide means 6216 that are closer to the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b are narrower.

The first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b are arranged on the front surface of the substrate 6220, and have a detection range 6221c formed with a width slightly wider than the thickness of the detection piece 6234. When inserted, a signal is issued to the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21).

The first engaging portion 6222 is a hole provided in the substrate 6220 through which the open state guide means 6215 can pass, and formed in substantially the same shape as the outer periphery of the open state guide means 6215. The open state guide means 6215 is configured to hold the board 6220 in a state where the board 6220 is attached to the fixed part 6210, the protruding part 6217 is inserted into the first engaging part 6222, and the groove part 6218 is arranged on the front side of the board 6220. 6220.

The second engaging portion 6223 is a notch provided in the substrate 6220 and formed in substantially the same shape as at least a portion of the outer periphery of the protruding portion 6217 of the closed state guide means 6216. In the closed state guide means 6216, when the board 6220 is attached to the fixing part 6210, at least a part of the outer periphery of the protruding part 6217 fits into the second engaging part 6223, and the groove part 6218 is arranged on the front side of the board 6220. In the disposed state, it engages the substrate 6220.

The detection piece 6234 is a plate-shaped body that extends along the moving direction of the left shutter unit 6230, and when the left shutter unit 6230 is in the open state, it covers the detection range 6221c of the first detection means 6221a and the groove portion 6218 of the open state guide means 6215. 6218a of equal width. Furthermore, when the left shutter unit 6230 is in the closed state, the detection piece 6234 is disposed across the detection range 6221c of the second detection means 6221b and the equal width portion 6218a of the groove 6218 of the closed state guide means 6216. . In this way, the detection piece 6234 is disposed astride the first detection means 6221a or the second detection means 6221b and the open state guide means 6215 or the closed state guide means 6216 in the open state or the closed state. As a result, even if an impact is applied to the left shutter unit 6230 during movement of the left shutter unit 6230 from the closed state to the open state and the moving path of the detection piece 6234 is shifted, the guide portion 6218b allows the first detection means to move smoothly. 6221a, the detection piece 6234 and the first detection means 6221a will not collide and damage the parts. Further, for example, when an impact is applied and an unexpected force acts on the left shutter unit 6230 in the open state or the closed state, the movement of the detection piece 6234 due to the impact is received by the open state guide means 6215 or the closed state guide means 6216. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detection piece 6234 from colliding with the first detection means 6221a or the second detection means 6221b and damaging the first detection means 6221a or the second detection means 6221b due to such an impact.

With the above configuration, when the left shutter unit 6230 moves from the closed state to the open state, the detection piece 6234 moves along the movement path (from the lower right to the upper left in the example shown in FIG. 204) as the left shutter unit 6230 moves. move along. At this time, even if the detection piece 6234 moves in a state that deviates from the movement path, the detection piece 6234 is guided by the guide portion 6218b of the open state guide means 6215 and inserted into the equal width portion 6218a. It is returned to the movement path and inserted into the detection range 6221c of the first detection means 6221a.

Furthermore, when the left shutter unit 6230 moves from the open state to the closed state, the detection piece 6234 moves along the movement path (from the upper left to the lower right in the example shown in FIG. 204) as the left shutter unit 6230 moves. do. At this time, even if the detection piece 6234 moves in a state that deviates from the movement path, the detection piece 6234 is guided by the guide portion 6218b of the closed state guide means 6216 and inserted into the equal width portion 6218a. It is returned to the movement path and inserted into the detection range 6221c of the second detection means 6221b.

In this way, the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b are provided on the fixed part 6210, which is separate from the substrate 6220, and the decorative part 6233 and the decorative part 6243 are moved from the first position to the second position. Open state guide means 6215 and closed state guide means 6216 are provided to guide the detection piece 6234 and the detection piece 6244 to the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b when moving to the position.
As a result, when the decorative portion 6233 or the decorative portion 6243 moves from the first position to the second position, the detection piece 6234 or the detection piece 6244 is activated to the first detection state by the open state guide means 6215 and the closed state guide means 6216. Since it is guided by the means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b, it is possible to move to a position out of the detection range of the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b, or to move to a position outside the detection range of the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b. This makes it possible to avoid problems such as collisions.
Furthermore, since the open state guiding means 6215 and the closed state guiding means 6216 are provided separately from the first detecting means 6221a and the second detecting means 6221b, the moving detecting piece 6234 and the detecting piece 6244 are connected to the open state guiding means 6215 and Even if the closed state guide means 6216 is contacted, the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b can be avoided from being affected.

Further, the open state guide means 6215 and the closed state guide means 6216 have a groove 6218 into which the detection piece 6234 and the detection piece 6244 are inserted, and the groove 6218 has an end far from the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b. from the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b than from the groove portion formed on the side (the end of the equal width portion 6218a and the guide portion 6218b that is far from the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b). The groove portion formed on the nearer end side (the end portion on the side closer to the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b of the guide portion 6218b) is formed narrower.
As a result, when the detection piece 6234 moves along the groove 6218 from the far end side to the near end side from the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b, from the relatively wide groove part 6218 to the relatively narrow groove part By moving while being guided by the detection piece 6218, it becomes possible to more smoothly guide the detection piece 6234 to the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b.

Further, since the open state guide means 6215 and the closed state guide means 6216 are engaged with the substrate 6220 on which the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b are provided, the open state guide means 6215 and the closed state guide means 6216 It becomes possible to maintain the relative positions of the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b, and even if the open state guide means 6215 and the closed state guide means 6216 move, the detection piece 6234 and the detection It becomes possible to reliably guide the piece 6244 to the first detection means 6221a and the second detection means 6221b.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.

Next, a configuration for restricting rearward movement of the middle shutter unit 6250 will be described.
FIG. 205 is an enlarged perspective view of the structure around the structure (movement regulating section 6254) that regulates the rearward movement of the middle shutter unit 6250, and FIG. 206 shows the structure (movement regulating section 6254) that regulates the rearward movement of the middle shutter unit 6250. FIG.

The decoration part 6253 is provided with a movement restriction part 6254 protruding rearward near the lower end, and this movement restriction part 6254 is a decoration part support hole which is a through hole formed at approximately the center of the frame part 6251. 6251c, and is fixed to the frame portion 6251 with a fixing member such as a screw.

The movement regulating portion 6254 is formed in a substantially cross shape when viewed from the rear side, and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the frame portion 6251 when the decorative portion 6253 is attached to the frame portion 6251. The decorative part support hole 6251c is formed to have substantially the same shape as the substantially cross-shaped outer shape seen from the rear side of the movement restriction part 6254, and the movement restriction part 6254 is inserted from the front side. Thereby, the decorative portion 6253 and the frame portion 6251 can be engaged with each other. By forming the movement restricting part 6254 into a substantially cross shape in this way, for example, the state in which the decorative part 6253 is temporarily fixed to the frame part 6251 (the state in which the movement restricting part 6254 is simply inserted into the decorative part support hole 6251c) can be improved. ) can prevent the decorative portion 6253 from rotating or shifting from its proper position relative to the frame portion 6251.

At the rear end of the movement restricting portion 6254, protrusions 6524a that protrude further rearward are provided at the end portions (left and right ends and upper and lower ends) of a substantially cross shape that protrude in each direction.

As shown in FIG. 206, in the open state, the middle shutter unit 6250 includes a decorative portion 6253 and a part of the frame portion 6251 in a housing portion 6250a formed between the front surface of the cover member 6100 and the launch unit 6300. is accommodated, and the decorative portion 6253 is not visible from the front side. When the middle shutter unit 6250 is in the closed state, it moves upward along the front surface of the cover member 6100 to a position where it can be seen from the front side (the position indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 206).

At this time, the decoration part 6253 of the middle shutter unit 6250 moves upward while being suspended by the frame part 6251, so it is in a state where it can move backward, but the movement restriction part 6254 prevents it from moving backward. Regulated. Further, as shown in FIG. 205, by providing the protrusion 6524a on the rear side of the movement restriction part 6254, even if the movement restriction part 6254 moves while slidingly contacting the front surface of the cover member 6100, the protrusion 6524a Since only the protruding portion 6524a is in sliding contact with the front surface of the cover member 6100, resistance can be reduced compared to a case where the protruding portion 6524a is not provided, so that the decorative portion 6253 can be moved smoothly.

In this way, the decorative part 6253 that is movable in the vertical direction is supported by the frame part 6251 from both end sides, and at least part of the frame part 6251 is controlled in the frame part 6251 from moving backward. A housing part 6250a that can house the inside of the housing 6250a and a slidable movement restriction part 6254 are provided.
As a result, even if a force to move the decorative part 6253 backward is generated and this force causes the decorative part 6253 or the frame part 6251 that supports the decorative part 6253 to wag, the movement regulating part 6254 will prevent the decorative part 6253 from moving backward. This restricts the movement of the decorative part 6253 and the frame part 6251 to the rear, making it possible to prevent the decorative part 6253 and the frame part 6251 from colliding with the housing part 6250a.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent breakdowns due to collisions with other parts even if the movable member bends.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the main body subunit 600 with the shutter unit 6200 in a closed state.
When the shutter unit 6200 as described above is in the closed state, the main body subunit 600 is in the state shown in FIG. and the decorative portion 6243 are combined to form a shutter in which the three movable bodies form an integrated pattern, which closes the liquid crystal visible area 1d, and the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 that was visible in the open state shown in FIG. 181. 4d becomes invisible.

(launch unit)
FIG. 208 is an exploded perspective view of the launch unit 6300.
The launch unit 6300 includes a main body 6310, a cover portion 6340, a decorative panel 6350, and a light emitting display unit 6360. The launch unit 6300 has a plurality of performance bodies 6315 movably arranged in a performance body movement area 6310a, and is an example of a moving means that can move the performance bodies 6315.

FIG. 209 is a perspective view showing the main body 6310 of the launch unit 6300.
The main body 6310 constitutes a cover on the rear side of the launch unit 6300, and a performance body movement area 6310a is formed approximately in the center. At least a portion of the performance body movement area 6310a overlaps with the liquid crystal visible area 1d (see FIG. 181). A portion of the main body 6310 that overlaps the liquid crystal visible area 1d is formed of a translucent material. The main body 6310 includes a first moving mechanism 6320 and a pair of left and right second moving mechanisms 6330 sandwiching the first moving mechanism 6320 below the performance body movement area 6310a. Further, the main body 6310 is provided with a motor 6311 and a transmission section 6312. The motor 6311 is driven under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21). The transmission section 6312 is composed of one or more rotating gears that transmit the rotational force of the motor 6311 to the first moving mechanism 6320.

Returning to FIG. 208, the cover part 6340 is disposed on the front side of the main body 6310, and forms a performance body movement area 6310a between the cover part 6340 and a member forming the back surface of the main body 6310, and the area forming the performance body movement area 6310a. is made of translucent material. In the decorative panel 6350, a lens member formed in a predetermined shape is disposed on the frontmost surface, and an LED that emits light under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21) is disposed behind the lens member. The light-emitting display unit 6360 has a decorative sheet attached to the inside of a case member formed in a predetermined shape on the front surface, and has LEDs that emit light under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21) to display predetermined information, etc. is located.

FIG. 210 is a front view of the main body 6310 of the launch unit 6300 in its initial state, and FIG. 211 is a front view of the main body of the launch unit 6300 in its descended state.
The first moving mechanism 6320 includes an arm portion 6321, a biasing member 6322, and a rotation mechanism 6323.

The arm part 6321 includes a pedestal part 6321b having a performance element contacting surface 6321a that forms the bottom surface at the approximate center of the performance element floating area 6310a, and a support part that supports the pedestal part 6321b from below and extends in the direction in which the rotation mechanism 6323 is provided. and a sliding contact portion 6321e that is provided at the end of the support portion 6321c on the rotation mechanism 6323 side and has a sliding surface 6321d with which the rotation mechanism 6323 slides.

The presentation element contact surface 6321a is formed substantially horizontally or in the form of a mountain with its apex at approximately the center, and a plurality of presentation objects 6315 are placed thereon. The pedestal portion 6321b and the support portion 6321c are supported by a first moving mechanism guide portion 6313 formed in the main body 6310 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The sliding contact portion 6321e is arranged such that the sliding surface 6321d is located on the right side of the center on the rotational trajectory of the pressing portion 6323b of the rotation mechanism 6323, which will be described later. In the sliding contact portion 6321e, the sliding surface 6321d is arranged above the center of the rotational trajectory of the pressing portion 6323b in the initial state, and in this state, the pressing portion 6323b comes into contact with the sliding surface 6321d, and the pressing portion 6323b being pushed downwards. As a result, the pedestal portion 6321b and the support portion 6321c move downward from the initial state shown in FIG. 210 and enter the descending state shown in FIG. 211.

The biasing member 6322 is formed of, for example, a spring member extending in the vertical direction, and has an upper end fixed to a position higher than the sliding contact portion 6321e of the arm portion 6321 in the main body 6310, and a lower end fixed to the sliding contact portion 6321e.

The rotation mechanism 6323 includes a rotating body 6323a, a pressing portion 6323b, and a detection piece 6323c. The rotating body 6323a has a disc shape that rotates clockwise around a rotating shaft extending in the front-rear direction when driven by the motor 6311 via the transmission section 6312, and has a gear (not shown) that meshes with the transmission section 6312. It is rotatably supported by the main body 6310. The pressing portion 6323b stands upright from the front surface of the rotary body 6323a, extends along the rotational direction of the rotary body 6323a when viewed from the front side, is formed in an arc shape with an opening angle of approximately 180 degrees, and has an outer peripheral surface that is similar to the arm portion. It is possible to make sliding contact with the sliding contact surface 6321d of 6321. The detection piece 6323c is provided on the rotating body 6323a or the pressing portion 6323b, and is provided at a position that can be detected by the initial position detection means 6316 provided on the main body 6310 in the initial state shown in FIG. The initial position detection means 6316 is composed of a sensor, and when it detects the detection piece 6323c, it issues a signal to the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21).

The pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 are provided on the left and right sides of the pedestal section 6321b of the first moving mechanism 6320, and include an arm section 6331 and a biasing member 6332.

The arm portions 6331 of the pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 each have a performance body contact surface 6331a that forms the bottom surface of the left and right end portions of the performance body movement area 6310a, and a pedestal portion 6321b of the first movement mechanism 6320 in the initial state. , and has a sliding surface 6331b that slides into contact with the pedestal portion 6321b when the pedestal portion 6321b moves downward, and a rotation shaft 6331c that is disposed outside the production body contact surface 6331a. The arm portion 6331 is rotatably supported by the main body 6310 around a rotation shaft 6331c. Further, the arm portion 6331 is rotatably supported by a second moving mechanism guide portion 6314 formed on the main body 6310.

The biasing member 6332 is, for example, configured with a spring member extending in the vertical direction, and has a lower end that is connected to the outer end of the arm portion 6331 (centering on the rotation axis 6331c, and the pedestal portion 6321b of the first moving mechanism 6320) in the main body 6310. The upper end is fixed to the outer end of the arm part 6331.

Next, the operation of the launch unit 6300 will be explained.
In the launch unit 6300, since the sliding surface 6321d of the arm portion 6321 of the first moving mechanism 6320 is disposed on the right side of the center of the rotation trajectory of the pressing portion 6323b of the rotating mechanism 6323, in the initial state shown in FIG. , since the pressing portion 6323b of the rotation mechanism 6323 is located on the left side of the center on the rotational trajectory, the sliding portion 6321e is released from the pressing portion 6323b (not pressed). In such an initial state, the performance body contact surface 6321a of the first moving mechanism 6320 and the performance body contact surface 6331a of the second movement mechanism 6330 form a substantially horizontal surface, and a plurality of performance bodies 6315 are placed on this surface. It is placed. The performance body contact surface 6321a of the first moving mechanism 6320 and the performance body contact surface 6331a of the second movement mechanism 6330 are arranged adjacent to each other.

When the motor 6311 is driven from this initial state (the second position, which is the normal upright position, not being biased by the biasing members 6322 and 6332) under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21), When the rotating body 6323a of the rotating mechanism 6323 rotates clockwise and the pressing part 6323b moves to the right from the center on the rotational trajectory, the sliding part 6321e (arm part 6321) is pressed by the pressing part 6323b, and the sliding part 6321e (arm part 6321) is pressed to the right of the pressing part 6323b. It moves downward as it rotates. At this time, by moving the sliding contact portion 6321e downward, the biasing member 6322 is extended, and elastic force is stored in the biasing member 6322. Further, as the arm portion 6321 of the first moving mechanism 6320 moves downward, the arm portions 6331 of the pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 rotate around the rotation axis 6331c, and move inward (first moving mechanism 6320 (on the pedestal portion 6321b side) moves downward, and the production body contact surface 6331a becomes inclined downward toward the pedestal portion 6321b. That is, before moving the performance body 6315, the performance body contact surface 6321a of the first moving mechanism 6320 may be placed lower than at least part of the performance body contact surface 6331a of the second movement mechanism 6330. It is possible. As a result, the plurality of performance objects 6315 are gathered toward the pedestal portion 6321b (center side) of the first moving mechanism 6320, and are in the descending state shown in FIG. 211. At this time, the arm portion 6331 of the second moving mechanism 6330 rotates inward (toward the pedestal portion 6321b side) around the rotation axis 6331c, thereby extending the biasing member 6332. Elastic force is stored in Further, the performance body contact surface 6321a that contacts the performance body 6315 in the first moving mechanism 6320 is located lower than at least a part of the performance body contact surface 6331a that contacts the performance body 6315 in the second movement mechanism 6330. As a result, some of the performance bodies 6315 of the plurality of performance bodies that were in contact with the second movement mechanism 6330 come into contact with the first movement mechanism 6320 from the position where they were in contact with the second movement mechanism 6330 due to their own weight. Move to position.

FIG. 212 is a front view showing the main body subunit 600 in a state in which the launch unit 6300 launches the presentation body 6315.
When the rotary body 6323a of the rotation mechanism 6323 further rotates clockwise from the lowered state shown in FIG. 211 (the first position, which is the position where the biasing member 6322 and the biasing member 6332 are biased), the pressing portion 6323b It moves to the left of the center on the rotational trajectory and separates from the sliding contact portion 6321e of the first moving mechanism 6320. At this time, the arm portion 6321 of the first moving mechanism 6320 is flipped upward by the elastic force stored in the biasing member 6322. Furthermore, by flipping the arm portion 6321 of the first moving mechanism 6320 upward, the inner side (the pedestal portion 6321b side) of the arm portion 6331 of the second moving mechanism 6330 is also released, and the elastic force stored in the biasing member 6332 is released. As a result, the inner side (the pedestal portion 6321b side) rotates upward about the rotation axis 6331c. As a result, the performance body 6315 placed on the performance body contact surface 6321a of the first moving mechanism 6320 and the performance body contact surface 6331a of the second movement mechanism 6330 is separated from the performance body contact surface 6321a and the performance body contact surface 6331a. 212, and moves to the effect position (for example, the liquid crystal visible area 1d), resulting in the state shown in FIG. In this way, the first moving mechanism 6320 can move the directing body 6315 upward, and the second moving mechanism 6330 can move the directing body 6315 upwardly, and the second moving mechanism 6330 can rotate upwardly from the center. , it is possible to move the presentation body 6315. Furthermore, the pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 are arranged to face each other, and one can move the presentation body 6315 in the direction of clockwise rotation, while Tagata can move the presentation body 6315 in the direction of rotation to the left. It is possible to move it. That is, the pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 can move the presentation bodies 6315 toward each other. Further, the plurality of performance bodies 6315 include a performance body that is launched upward by the first moving mechanism 6320 and a performance body that is moved in a direction different from the upward direction by the second movement mechanism 6330. In detail, the plurality of effects 6315 are caused to move upward from a state in which they are in contact with the first movement mechanism 6320 below the central part in the left-right direction of the effect element movement area 6310a. The body 6315 and the pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 move from the state in which it is in contact with the pair of second mechanisms 6330 below the left part or below the right part in the left-right direction of the performance body movement area 6310a to the upper part of the center part. and a performance body 6315 that moves diagonally upward toward the target.

In this way, it is possible to move the performance body 6315 in a predetermined direction by the first moving mechanism 6320, and to move it in a different direction from the first moving mechanism 6320 by the second moving mechanism 6330.
As a result, the presentation body 6315 can be moved in a predetermined direction by the first movement mechanism 6320, a direction different from the predetermined direction by the second movement mechanism 6330, or a direction that combines these directions, so the presentation body 6315 can be moved in various directions. It is possible to move to.

In addition, since the performance body 6315 is launched upward by the first moving mechanism 6320 and moved in a direction different from the upward direction by the second movement mechanism 6330, the performance body 6315 is not only launched upward but also in various directions. is diffused, so it is possible to create a visually interesting production.

Further, the launch unit 6300 includes a first moving mechanism 6320 capable of moving the presentation body 6315 and a second moving mechanism 6330 different from the first moving mechanism 6320. The plurality of performance bodies 6315 include a performance body that is moved by a first movement mechanism 6320 and a performance body that is moved by a second movement mechanism 6330. The second moving mechanism 6330 is capable of moving the performance body 6315 in a direction different from that of the first moving mechanism 6320. The performance body contact surface 6321a of the first moving mechanism 6320 and the performance body contact surface 6331a of the second movement mechanism 6330 are adjacent to each other. Then, when the launch unit 6300 moves from the second position to the first position, the surface that is in contact with the presentation body 6315 is larger than at least a portion of the presentation body contact surface 6331a of the second moving mechanism 6330. Since the performance element contact surface 6321a of the first movement mechanism 6320 is located lower, some of the performance bodies 6315 that were in contact with the second movement mechanism 6330 are moved to the second movement due to their own weight. It is possible to move from a position where it is in contact with the mechanism 6330 to a position where it is in contact with the first moving mechanism 6320.

As a result, when the launch unit 6300 moves from the second position to the first position, a part of the performance body 6315 is gathered toward the performance body contact surface 6321a of the first moving mechanism 6320 due to its own weight, and the launch unit 6300 is moved. The performance body 6315 that has been moved from the initial position to the performance position and gathered toward the performance body contact surface 6321a of the first movement mechanism 6320 is moved by different movement mechanisms, the first movement mechanism 6320 and the second movement mechanism 6330. By doing so, it is possible to gather the presentation object in the central part where it is easily visible to the player, and it is also possible to move the presentation object 6315 in various directions compared to the case where the presentation object 6315 is moved only by the first moving mechanism 6320. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, the launch unit 6300 includes a first moving mechanism 6320 that can move the performance body 6315 and a pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 that are different from the first moving mechanism 6320. They are placed adjacent to each other on the left and right. The plurality of performance bodies 6315 are moved upward by the first movement mechanism 6320 from a state in which they are in contact with the first movement mechanism 6320 below the central part in the left-right direction of the performance body movement area 6310a. Then, the pair of second moving mechanisms 6330 moves from the state in which the performance element is in contact with the pair of second mechanisms 6330 at the lower left or right side in the left-right direction of the performance body moving area 6310a toward the upper part of the center. A presentation body 6315 that moves diagonally upward is included.

As a result, the launch unit 6300 is moved from the first position to the second position, and a part of the plurality of presentation bodies 6315 is moved upward in the center by the first moving mechanism 6320. By moving another part of the performance body diagonally upward toward the upper part of the central part by a pair of second moving mechanisms 6330, when the performance body 6315 is moved only by the first movement mechanism 6320, In comparison, it becomes possible to move the presentation body 6315 in various directions.
Therefore, by making it possible to move the presentation body in various directions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting presentations.

(Logo unit)
FIG. 213 is a front view showing the initial state of the logo unit 6400, and FIG. 214 is a front view showing the movable state of the logo unit 6400.
The logo unit 6400 includes a base portion 6410, a cover member 6420, and a decorative portion 6430, and the decorative portion 6430 is arranged in a first position in the initial state shown in FIG. 213 and in a diagonally downward left direction from the first position. and a second position in the movable state shown in FIG. 214. Such a decoration part 6430 is an example of a movable body that can move between a first position and a second position.

FIG. 215 is a front exploded perspective view of the logo unit 6400, and FIG. 216 is a rear exploded perspective view of the logo unit 6400.
The base portion 6410 includes a base body 6411, a motor 6412, a transmission portion 6413, and a slide member 6414. The base body 6411 is fixed to the upper part of the opening 6111 (see FIG. 195) of the cover member 6100, and is formed into a plate shape. The motor 6412 is fixed to the base body 6411 and is driven under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21). The transmission section 6413 is rotatably supported by the base body 6411, is configured with a rotating gear, and transmits the rotational force of the motor 6412 to the slide member 6414. The motor 6412 and the transmission section 6413 are an example of a driving means for driving the movable body. The slide member 6414 is formed in a plate shape extending along the moving direction of the decorative portion 6430, and has a gear formed on a side surface that meshes with the transmission portion 6413. Furthermore, the slide member 6414 is provided with a plurality of decorative part fixing parts 6414a that are formed in the shape of a shaft and protrude forward from the front surface and are arranged along the moving direction of the decorative part 6430.

The cover member 6420 covers the motor 6412, the transmission section 6413, and the slide member 6414 of the base body 6411 from the front side, has a decorative shape formed on the front surface, and is fixed to the base body 6411. The cover member 6420 is provided with a guide portion 6421 and an insertion hole 6422 that slidably support the decorative portion 6430 in the moving direction. The guide portion 6421 includes a groove extending along the moving direction and a roller that slidably engages with the groove, and is provided on the left and right sides of the cover member 6420, respectively. The insertion hole 6422 is a groove extending along the moving direction, and supports a decorative part fixing part 6414a of the slide member 6414 and a slide member fixing part 6431 of a decorative part 6430, which will be described later, so as to be slidable in the moving direction.

The decorative portion 6430 is placed in front of the cover member 6420, and has a lens member with a decorative shape such as a logo formed on the front surface, and an LED that emits light under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21) behind the lens member. is located. The decorative portion 6430 also has a slide member fixing portion 6431 on the rear surface that is a protrusion that engages with the decorative portion fixing portion 6414a of the slide member 6414, and a cover that is a protrusion that engages with the roller of the guide portion 6421 of the cover member 6420. A member fixing portion 6432 is provided. That is, the slide member 6414 is supported via the insertion hole 6422 of the cover member 6420 by a decorative portion 6430 that is supported by a cover member 6420 fixed to the base portion 6410 so as to be slidable in the moving direction.

Next, the operation of logo unit 6400 will be explained.
FIG. 217 is a front view showing the initial state of the base portion 6410 of the logo unit 6400, and FIG. 218 is a front view showing the movable state of the base portion 6410 of the logo unit 6400. In FIGS. 217 and 218, dotted lines indicate the outline of the decorative portion 6430 in each state.

In the logo unit 6400, from the initial state shown in FIG. 217, the motor 6412 is driven under the control of the sub-control board 33 (see FIG. 21), and the rotational force of the motor 6412 is transmitted to the slide member 6414 via the transmission section 6413. The decoration part 6430 supporting the slide member 6414 moves in the lower left direction, and enters the movable state shown in FIG. 218.

Next, a configuration for detecting the initial state of the logo unit 6400 will be described.
FIG. 219 is a rear perspective view of the slide member 6414 of the logo unit 6400.
The slide member 6414 further includes a detection piece 6414b extending along the movement direction, and a protrusion 6414c protruding from the rear surface in the rear direction that is perpendicular to the movement direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 217, on the base portion 6410, an initial position detection means 6415, which is a sensor that transmits a signal when the slide member 6414 is in the first position in the initial state, is capable of detecting the detection piece 6414b. It is located in a suitable position.

FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for detecting the state of the logo unit 6400. In FIG. 220, the line indicating the outer shape of the decorative portion 6430 is shown as a dotted line.
In the logo unit 6400, when the slide member 6414 supported by the decorative portion 6430 moves from the movable state to the initial state (from the second position to the first position), the detection piece 6414b of the slide member 6414 moves in the moving direction. By moving along the moving path and being inserted into the detection range 6415a of the initial position detecting means 6415 formed on this movement path, the initial position detecting means 6415 issues a signal to the sub control board 33 (see FIG. 21).

At this time, the protruding portion 6414c of the slide member 6414 comes into contact with the front surface of the base portion 6410 disposed on the rear side of the slide member 6414 even if the slide member 6414 falls backward. That is, the protruding portion 6414c is disposed at a position facing the base portion 6410, and when the decorative portion 6430 moves from the second position to the first position, the protruding portion 6414c moves in the direction in which the detection piece 6414b comes into contact with the base portion 6410. restrict movement. In this way, the protrusion 6414c prevents the slide member 6414 from moving in a direction different from the movement direction. As a result, when the slide member 6414 moves from the movable state to the initial state (from the second position to the first position), the detection piece 6414b moves toward the base portion 6410 and deviates from the movement path, causing the initial position to be detected. It is possible to prevent the detection range 6415a from falling out of the detection range 6415a of the means 6415 or coming into contact with a portion other than the detection range 6415a of the initial position detection means 6415, and damaging the detection range 6415a.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.

Although the logo unit 6400 does not have a guide means for guiding the slide member 6414, it may be provided with a guide means for guiding the detection piece 6234 like the shutter unit 6200 described above. Specifically, a member similar to the protrusion 6217 and groove 62l8 of the shutter unit 6200 is provided on the base portion 6410 so as to guide the detection piece 6414b of the slide member 6414 to the detection range 6415a of the initial position detection means 6415. Good too.

FIG. 221 is a front view showing the main body subunit 600 with the logo unit 6400 in a movable state.
When the logo unit 6400 as described above is in the movable state, the main body subunit 600 is in the state shown in FIG. 221, in which the lower part of the decorative portion 6430 overlaps a part of the liquid crystal visible area 1d. Further, by moving the decorative portion 6430 from the first position to the second position, the decoration on the front surface of the cover member 6420 that was placed after the decorative portion 6430 becomes visible.

Each of the configurations of the first to fifth embodiments described above can be appropriately used or modified in other embodiments within the scope of the present invention, and can be combined in any configuration.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments. In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine has been described as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, to pinball gaming machines and enclosed gaming machines. In addition, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines, slot machines, and pachi-slot gaming machines, in addition to the gaming machines listed above.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the numerical values, information, constituent elements, etc. shown in the above embodiments are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

Based on the above embodiments, an outline of the present invention will be listed below.

(Additional note 1)
[Background technology]
This type of gaming machine has, for example, a first performance accessory and a second performance accessory, and is configured to perform a performance by combining these performance accessories. Some methods have been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-23889).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the operation mode of each of the performance accessories when combined is monotonous, so the various performance effects lack interest and interest, and there is room for devising ways to improve this.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance fun and interest through various performance effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A housing (for example, main body unit 400), a plurality of movable bodies (for example, lower movable body 4110, left movable body 4210, right movable body 4310, upright movable body 4410) disposed within the housing, and A gaming machine comprising a driving means (for example, a motor 4170, 4250, 4350, 4440) for driving a movable body,
The plurality of movable bodies are
From a first retreat position (for example, a retreat position below the opening area 1d) that is difficult for the player to see within the housing, to a first appearance position (for example, an opening area 1d) that is easy to see within the viewing plane (for example, the opening area 1d). A first movable body (for example, a lower movable body 4110) that can move linearly so as to appear at an appearance position near the lower edge of 1d;
From a second retracted position that is difficult for the player to see within the housing (for example, a retracted position to the left of the opening area 1d) to a second appearance position that is easy to see in the viewing plane (for example, an appearance position to the left of the opening area 1d). ); a second movable body (e.g., left movable body 4210) rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the viewing plane so as to appear in the field;
From a third retracted position in the case where the player is difficult to see (e.g., a retracted position where the back part 4410B is face down) to a third appearance position in the viewing plane that is easy to see (e.g., the back part 4410B is face up). a third movable body (e.g., an upright movable body 4410) that is rotatable about an axis parallel to the viewing plane so as to emerge into a state (an appearance position);
including;
When the plurality of movable bodies including the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body appear within the viewing plane, the entire image of the performance is visible. It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body can be made to appear in the field of view according to different operation modes, so that the entire image of the performance can be viewed. , the operation modes are diverse, and the fun and interest can be enhanced through a variety of production effects.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance fun and interest through various performance effects.

(Appendix 1-1)
[Background technology]
This type of gaming machine has, for example, a first performance accessory and a second performance accessory as performance accessories, and is configured to perform a performance by combining these performance accessories. Some methods have been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-23889).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the operation mode of each of the performance accessories when combined is monotonous, so it lacks fun and interest as a diverse and unified performance effect, and there is no room for ingenuity to improve this. there were.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance fun and interest through various and unified performance effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A housing (for example, main body unit 400), a plurality of movable bodies (for example, lower movable body 4110, left movable body 4210, right movable body 4310, upright movable body 4410) disposed within the housing, and A gaming machine comprising a driving means (for example, a motor 4170, 4250, 4350, 4440) for driving a movable body,
The plurality of movable bodies are
From a first retreat position (for example, a retreat position below the opening area 1d) that is difficult for the player to see within the housing, to a first appearance position (for example, an opening area 1d) that is easy to see within the viewing plane (for example, the opening area 1d). A first movable body (for example, a lower movable body 4110) that can move linearly so as to appear at an appearance position near the lower edge of 1d;
From a second retracted position that is difficult for the player to see within the housing (for example, a retracted position to the left of the opening area 1d) to a second appearance position that is easy to see in the viewing plane (for example, an appearance position to the left of the opening area 1d). ); a second movable body (e.g., left movable body 4210) rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the viewing plane so as to appear in the field;
From a third retracted position in the case where the player is difficult to see (e.g., a retracted position where the back part 4410B is face down) to a third appearance position in the viewing plane that is easy to see (e.g., the back part 4410B is face up). a third movable body (e.g., an upright movable body 4410) that is rotatable about an axis parallel to the viewing plane so as to emerge into a state (an appearance position);
From a fourth retracted position that is difficult for the player to see within the housing (for example, a retracted position to the right of the opening area 1d) to a fourth appearance position that is easy to see in the viewing plane (for example, an appearance position to the right of the opening area 1d). ); a fourth movable body (e.g., right movable body 4310) rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the viewing plane so as to appear as
including;
When the plurality of movable bodies including the first movable body, the second movable body, the third movable body, and the fourth movable body appear within the viewing plane, the entire image of the performance is visible. It is characterized by being possible.

According to such a configuration, the first movable body, the second movable body, the third movable body, and the fourth movable body are made to appear in the field of view using different operation modes, so that the entire image of the performance can be seen. Since it can be visually recognized, it is possible to increase interest and interest as a production effect with a variety of operation modes and a sense of unity.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance fun and interest through various and unified performance effects.

(Appendix 1-2)
[Background technology]
This type of gaming machine has, for example, a first performance accessory and a second performance accessory as performance accessories, and is configured to perform a performance by combining these performance accessories. Some methods have been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-23889).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the operation mode of each performance accessory when combined is monotonous, so it lacks interest and interest as a variety of interlocking performance effects, and there is no room for ingenuity to improve this. there were.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance fun and interest through various and interlocking performance effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A housing (for example, main body unit 400), a plurality of movable bodies (for example, lower movable body 4110, left movable body 4210, right movable body 4310, upright movable body 4410) disposed within the housing, and A gaming machine comprising a driving means (for example, a motor 4170, 4250, 4350, 4440) for driving a movable body,
The plurality of movable bodies are
From a first retreat position (for example, a retreat position below the opening area 1d) that is difficult for the player to see within the housing, to a first appearance position (for example, an opening area 1d) that is easy to see within the viewing plane (for example, the opening area 1d). A first movable body (for example, a lower movable body 4110) that can move linearly so as to appear at an appearance position near the lower edge of 1d;
From a second retracted position that is difficult for the player to see within the housing (for example, a retracted position to the right of the opening area 1d) to a second appearance position that is easy to see in the viewing plane (for example, an appearance position to the right of the opening area 1d). );
From a third retracted position in the case where the player is difficult to see (e.g., a retracted position where the back part 4410B is face down) to a third appearance position in the viewing plane that is easy to see (e.g., the back part 4410B is face up). a third movable body (e.g., an upright movable body 4410) that is rotatable about an axis parallel to the viewing plane so as to emerge into a state (an appearance position);
including;
After causing the first movable body and the second movable body to appear at the first appearance position and the second appearance position, rotate the third movable body to appear at the third appearance position, The present invention is characterized in that by making the plurality of movable bodies appear within the viewing plane, the entire image of the performance can be visually recognized.

According to such a configuration, the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are made to appear in the field of view using different operation modes, and at that time, the first movable body and the second movable body are After the movable body appears, by rotating and making the third movable body appear, the entire image of the performance can be seen through successive different movements, so the movement modes are diverse and interlocked. As a production effect, it can increase interest and interest.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance fun and interest through various and interlocking performance effects.

(Appendix 1-3)
[Background technology]
This type of gaming machine has, for example, a first performance accessory and a second performance accessory, and is configured to perform a performance by combining these performance accessories. Some methods have been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-23889).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machines, the operation mode of each of the performance accessories when combined is monotonous, so it lacks the fun and interest as a variety of performance effects, as well as the dynamism when combined. There was room to do so.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the dynamicity when combining together with the fun and interest as a variety of performance effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A housing (for example, main body unit 400), a plurality of movable bodies (for example, lower movable body 4110, left movable body 4210, right movable body 4310, upright movable body 4410) disposed within the housing, and A gaming machine comprising a driving means (for example, a motor 4170, 4250, 4350, 4440) for driving a movable body,
The plurality of movable bodies are
From a first retreat position (for example, a retreat position below the opening area 1d) that is difficult for the player to see within the housing, to a first appearance position (for example, an opening area 1d) that is easy to see within the viewing plane (for example, the opening area 1d). A first movable body (for example, a lower movable body 4110) that can move linearly so as to appear at an appearance position near the lower edge of 1d;
From a second retracted position that is difficult for the player to see within the housing (for example, a retracted position to the left of the opening area 1d) to a second appearance position that is easy to see in the viewing plane (for example, an appearance position to the left of the opening area 1d). ); a second movable body (e.g., left movable body 4210) rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the viewing plane so as to appear in the field;
From a third retracted position in the case where the player is difficult to see (e.g., a retracted position where the back part 4410B is face down) to a third appearance position in the viewing plane that is easy to see (e.g., the back part 4410B is face up). a third movable body (e.g., an upright movable body 4410) that is rotatable about an axis parallel to the viewing plane so as to emerge into a state (an appearance position);
including;
The first movable body is moved upward to appear at the first appearance position, and the second movable body is rotated from a standing posture to a sideways posture and appears at the second appearance position, thereby causing the first movable body to appear at the second appearance position. The movable body and the second movable body are combined to make the plurality of movable bodies appear within the viewing plane, so that the entire image of the performance can be viewed.

According to such a configuration, the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are made to appear in the field of view using different operation modes, and at that time, the first movable body is caused to move upward. By making it appear at the first appearance position, and by rotating the second movable body from a standing position to a sideways position to appear at the second appearance position and combining them, the overall image of the performance can be greatly combined with different movements. Since it is possible to visually confirm that the robots are moving, it is possible to enhance the dynamicity when they are combined, as well as the fun and interest as a production effect with a variety of motion modes.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the dynamicity when combining together with the fun and interest as a variety of performance effects.

(Additional note 2)
[Background technology]
This type of gaming machine has a first performance accessory and a second performance accessory, each of which is provided with a light source inside, as a performance accessory, and when these performance accessories are combined, a single performance accessory is created. A device configured to perform a presentation has been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-23889).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a light source is provided for each performance accessory, which has the disadvantage of increasing the cost of parts related to the light-emitting performance.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the cost of parts related to light emitting effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A plurality of movable bodies (for example, a lower movable body 4110, a left movable body 4210, a right movable body 4310, an upright movable body 4410) and driving means for driving the plurality of movable bodies (for example, motors 4170, 4250, 4350, 4440). ),
The plurality of movable bodies are
a first movable body (e.g., lower movable body 4110) having a light emitting means (e.g., light emitting board 4114) therein;
a second movable body (for example, right movable body 4310) that does not have a light emitting means inside;
including;
The first movable body has a first lens member (for example, an upper edge lens member 4118) that guides the light from the light emitting means in a predetermined direction, and the first movable body has a first retractable body that is difficult for the player to see by the driving means. It is movable from a position (for example, a retracted position below the opening area 1d) to a first appearance position (for example, an appearance position near the lower edge of the opening area 1d) that is easy to see;
The second movable body has a second lens member (for example, an upper edge lens member 4313) into which the light from the light emitting means is incident and guides the incident light in the predetermined direction, and the second movable body has a second lens member (for example, an upper edge lens member 4313) that receives the light from the light emitting means and guides the incident light in the predetermined direction. It is possible to move from a second retracted position where it is difficult for a person to see (e.g., a retracted position on the right side of the opening area 1d) to a second appearance position where it is easy to see (e.g., an appearance position on the right side of the opening area 1d);
When the second movable body is in the second retracted position, the light from the light emitting means does not enter the second lens member,
When the first movable body is located at the first appearance position and the second movable body moves to the second appearance position, light from the light emitting means reaches the second lens member. It is characterized by being incident.

According to such a configuration, when the first movable body having the light emitting means and the second movable body having no light emitting means are moved to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the first movable body is moved to the first appearance position and the second appearance position. The light from the light emitting means is not only irradiated in a predetermined direction through the first lens member, but also irradiated in a predetermined direction by the second lens member of the second movable body, so that the lighting effects can be produced. It is possible to reduce the cost of parts while increasing the cost.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the cost of parts related to light emitting effects.

(Appendix 2-1)
[Background technology]
This type of gaming machine has a first performance accessory and a second performance accessory, each of which is provided with a light source inside, as a performance accessory, and when these performance accessories are combined, a single performance accessory is created. A device configured to perform a presentation has been proposed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-23889).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a light source is provided for each performance accessory, which has the disadvantage of increasing the cost of parts related to the light-emitting performance.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the cost of parts related to light emitting effects.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A plurality of movable bodies (for example, a lower movable body 4110, a left movable body 4210, a right movable body 4310, an upright movable body 4410) and driving means for driving the plurality of movable bodies (for example, motors 4170, 4250, 4350, 4440). ),
The plurality of movable bodies are
a first movable body (e.g., lower movable body 4110) having a light emitting means (e.g., light emitting board 4114) therein;
a second movable body (for example, right movable body 4310) that does not have a light emitting means inside;
including;
The first movable body has a first lens member (for example, an upper edge lens member 4118) that guides the light from the light emitting means in a predetermined direction, and the first movable body has a first retractable body that is difficult for the player to see by the driving means. It is movable from a position (for example, a retracted position below the opening area 1d) to a first appearance position where it is easy to see (for example, an appearance position near the lower edge of the opening area 1d),
The second movable body has a second lens member (for example, an upper edge lens member 4313) into which the light from the light emitting means is incident and guides the incident light in the predetermined direction, and the second movable body has a second lens member (for example, an upper edge lens member 4313) that receives the light from the light emitting means and guides the incident light in the predetermined direction. It is possible to move from a second retracted position where it is difficult for a person to see (e.g., a retracted position on the right side of the opening area 1d) to a second appearance position where it is easy to see (e.g., an appearance position on the right side of the opening area 1d);
When the second movable body is in the second retracted position, the light from the light emitting means does not enter the second lens member,
When the first movable body is located at the first appearance position and the second movable body moves to the second appearance position, light from the light emitting means reaches the second lens member. incident,
The first lens member and the second lens member are preferably bent so as to guide the light from the light emitting means forward as the predetermined direction.

According to such a configuration, when the first movable body having the light emitting means and the second movable body having no light emitting means are moved to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the first movable body is moved to the first appearance position and the second appearance position. The light from the light emitting means is not only refracted and irradiated forward through the first lens member, but also refracted and irradiated forward through the second lens member of the second movable body. It is possible to reduce the cost of parts while increasing the luminous efficiency through the luminous effect.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the cost of parts related to light emitting effects.

(Appendix 3)
[Background technology]
For this type of gaming machine, one has been proposed in which a displacement member is provided as a performance accessory so that it can reciprocate up and down using the elastic force of an elastic spring (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-589 reference).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the telescopic spring is provided along the entire length of the reciprocating movement direction (vertical direction) of the displacement member. Therefore, if the length of the telescopic spring is relatively short, the reciprocating distance (stroke) of the displacement member will be relatively short due to the design condition of not exceeding the elastic limit of the spring. If it is made relatively long, there is a problem in that it is necessary to secure a large vertically long space for arranging the elastic spring.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game machine in which the stroke can be expanded according to the length of the spring for assisting reciprocating motion, and the spring can be arranged without any problem. The purpose is to

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a movable body capable of reciprocating between a first position (e.g., an upper position) and a second position (e.g., a lower position) located in a predetermined direction (e.g., an up-down direction) from the first position; (For example, a front decorative member 5210, a back member 5211, a connection support member 5220), and a driving means (for example, a motor 5270) for driving the movable body,
a base member (for example, front base member 5290) for supporting the movable body;
One end (for example, one end 5240A) is locked to the movable body, and the other end (for example, the other end 5240B) is locked to an appropriate part of the base member, so that it can expand and contract according to the reciprocating movement of the movable body. a spring member (e.g., spring member 5240);
a contact member (for example, a pulley member 5241) that contacts a side portion of the spring member and bends the spring member;
The spring member is
When the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, applying a biasing force to the movable body to pull it back toward the first position;
A first portion from the one end that is locked to the movable body to the side portion that abuts the contact member (for example, a portion from the one end 5240A to the part that contacts the pulley member 5241) extends in the predetermined direction. arranged so that
A second portion from the side portion that abuts the contact member to the other end that is locked to the base member (for example, a portion from the other end 5240B to the pulley member 5241) is moved in the predetermined direction. It is characterized by being arranged so as to extend in a different direction (for example, the left-right direction).

According to such a configuration, the first portion of the spring member is arranged to extend in a predetermined direction in which the movable body is reciprocated, and the second portion of the spring member is arranged to extend in a direction different from the predetermined direction. Since the movable body can be arranged so as to be extended, the spring member can be arranged without any problem while expanding the reciprocating distance of the movable body according to the length of the spring member for assisting the reciprocating motion.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the stroke can be expanded according to the length of the spring for assisting reciprocating motion, and the spring can be arranged without any problem.

(Appendix 3-1)
[Background technology]
For this type of gaming machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a displacement member is provided so as to be able to reciprocate up and down by using the elastic force of an elastic spring as a performance accessory (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-589 reference).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the telescopic spring is provided along the entire length of the reciprocating movement direction (vertical direction) of the displacement member. Therefore, if the length of the telescopic spring is relatively short, the reciprocating distance (stroke) of the displacement member will be relatively short due to the design condition of not exceeding the elastic limit of the spring. If it is made relatively long, there is a problem in that it is necessary to secure a large vertically long space for arranging the elastic spring.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game machine in which the stroke can be expanded according to the length of the spring for assisting reciprocating motion, and the spring can be arranged without any problem. The purpose is to

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a movable body capable of reciprocating between a first position (e.g., an upper position) and a second position (e.g., a lower position) located in a predetermined direction (e.g., an up-down direction) from the first position; (For example, a front decorative member 5210, a back member 5211, a connection support member 5220), and a driving means (for example, a motor 5270) for driving the movable body,
a base member (for example, front base member 5290) for supporting the movable body;
a guide member (for example, guide member 5230) for linearly guiding the movable body between the first position and the second position;
One end (for example, one end 5240A) is locked to the movable body, and the other end (for example, the other end 5240B) is locked to an appropriate part of the base member, so that it can expand and contract according to the reciprocating movement of the movable body. a spring member (e.g., spring member 5240);
a contact member (for example, a pulley member 5241) that contacts a side portion of the spring member and bends the spring member;
The spring member is
When the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, applying a biasing force to the movable body to pull it back toward the first position;
A first portion from the one end that is locked to the movable body to the side portion that abuts the contact member (for example, the portion from the one end 5240A to the pulley member 5241) extends along the guide member. arranged so that it stretches,
A second portion from the side portion that abuts the contact member to the other end that is locked to the base member (for example, a portion from the other end 5240B to the pulley member 5241) is the guide member. It is characterized by being arranged so as to extend away from the.

According to such a configuration, the first part of the spring member is arranged to extend along the guide member for guiding the movement of the movable body, and the second part of the spring member is arranged to extend away from the guide member. Since the movable body can be arranged so as to be extended, the spring member can be arranged without any problem while expanding the reciprocating distance of the movable body according to the length of the spring member for assisting the reciprocating motion.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the stroke can be expanded according to the length of the spring for assisting reciprocating motion and the spring can be arranged without any problem.

(Appendix 3-2)
[Background technology]
For this type of gaming machine, a game machine has been proposed in which a displacement member is provided so as to be able to reciprocate up and down by using the elastic force of an elastic spring as a performance accessory (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-589 reference).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the telescopic spring is provided along the entire length of the reciprocating movement direction (vertical direction) of the displacement member. Therefore, if the length of the telescopic spring is relatively short, the reciprocating distance (stroke) of the displacement member will be relatively short due to the design condition of not exceeding the elastic limit of the spring. If it is made relatively long, there is a problem in that a large vertically long space must be secured for arranging the elastic spring.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a game machine in which the stroke can be expanded according to the length of the spring for assisting reciprocating motion, and the spring can be arranged without any problem. The purpose is to

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a movable body capable of reciprocating between a first position (e.g., an upper position) and a second position (e.g., a lower position) located in a predetermined direction (e.g., an up-down direction) from the first position; (For example, a front decorative member 5210, a back member 5211, a connection support member 5220), and a driving means (for example, a motor 5270) for driving the movable body,
a base member (for example, front base member 5290) for supporting the movable body;
One end (for example, one end 5240A) is locked to the movable body, and the other end (for example, the other end 5240B) is locked to an appropriate part of the base member, so that it can expand and contract according to the reciprocating movement of the movable body. a spring member (e.g., spring member 5240);
a contact member (for example, a pulley member 5241) that contacts a side portion of the spring member;
The spring member is
When the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, applying a biasing force to the movable body to pull it back toward the first position;
A first portion from the one end that is locked to the movable body to the side portion that abuts the contact member (for example, a portion from the one end 5240A to the part that contacts the pulley member 5241) extends in the predetermined direction. arranged so that
The side portion that abuts the abutting member is bent and deformed, and a second portion from the side portion to the other end that is locked to the base member (for example, a second portion that contacts the pulley member 5241 from the other end 5240B) ) is arranged so as to extend in a direction different from the predetermined direction (for example, in the left-right direction).

According to such a configuration, the first part and the second part are formed in the spring member by bending and deforming the side part of the spring member by the abutting member, and the first part is reciprocated by the movable body. The second portion can be arranged to extend in a predetermined direction, and the second portion can be arranged to extend in a direction different from the predetermined direction, depending on the length of the spring member for assisting reciprocating motion. The spring member can be arranged without any problem while increasing the reciprocating distance of the movable body.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the stroke can be expanded according to the length of the spring for assisting reciprocating motion, and the spring can be arranged without any problem.

(Additional note 4)
[Background technology]
This type of game machine has a merging section in the horizontal passageway in order to smoothly guide the game balls that have fallen down from above through the vertical passageway provided on the game board to the horizontal passageway along the horizontal direction. It has been proposed that the bottom surface is formed to have different inclination angles with respect to the lateral direction (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-85803).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the game balls falling from the vertical passage hit the bottom surface of the confluence of the horizontal passage without slowing down the traveling speed much, so the game balls tend to bounce and collide with each other. There was a problem in that ball biting and ball clogging were likely to occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and is capable of suppressing the bouncing of the game ball and guiding the game ball smoothly in the horizontal direction, thereby effectively preventing ball biting and ball jamming of the game ball. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent such problems.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game machine equipped with a game board having a ball path (for example, ball paths T1 to T5) in which a game ball can roll,
The ball path includes a vertical path (for example, ball path T1) in which the game ball can fall,
The vertical passage is
A contact portion (for example, contact portion 7110A) that the fallen game ball hits;
A release part (for example, release part 7110B) for releasing the game ball that has reached the contact part in a predetermined lateral direction,
The contact part is provided with a deceleration part (for example, a first deceleration part 7300) that can guide the falling game ball in the predetermined lateral direction while decelerating the traveling speed of the game ball,
The speed reduction section is characterized in that it is formed so as to initially guide the game ball in a direction different from the predetermined lateral direction.

According to such a configuration, when a game ball that has fallen from the vertical passage hits the abutment part and is ejected from the ejection part in a predetermined horizontal direction, the speed reduction part provided in the abutment part reduces the speed of the game ball. Since the game ball is guided in a predetermined lateral direction while the advancing speed is reduced, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball and smoothly guide the game ball from the ejection part in the predetermined lateral direction, and even in the vicinity of the ejection part. It is possible to prevent ball chewing and ball clogging of game balls.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, to provide a game machine that can suppress the rebound of game balls, smoothly guide the game balls in the lateral direction, and can effectively prevent the game balls from biting or clogging. I can do it.

(Appendix 4-1)
[Background technology]
This type of game machine has a merging section in the horizontal passageway in order to smoothly guide the game balls that have fallen down from above through the vertical passageway provided on the game board to the horizontal passageway along the horizontal direction. It has been proposed that the bottom surface is formed to have different inclination angles with respect to the lateral direction (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-85803).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the game balls falling from the vertical passage hit the bottom surface of the confluence of the horizontal passage without slowing down the traveling speed much, so the game balls tend to bounce and collide with each other. There was a problem in that ball biting and ball clogging were likely to occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and is capable of suppressing the bouncing of the game ball and guiding the game ball smoothly in the horizontal direction, thereby effectively preventing ball biting and ball jamming of the game ball. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent such problems.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game board having a ball path (for example, ball paths T1 to T5) in which the game ball can roll;
a winning area (for example, second starting port 43) in which a game ball can win on the game board;
A gaming machine comprising: an opening/closing member (for example, a blade member 8300) that is capable of opening and closing the winning area and continuously guiding a plurality of game balls in a direction that does not allow them to enter the winning area in a closed state. There it is,
The ball path includes a vertical path (for example, ball path T1) in which the game ball can fall,
The vertical passage is
A contact portion (for example, contact portion 7110A) that the fallen game ball hits;
A release part (for example, release part 7110B) for releasing the game ball that has reached the contact part in a predetermined lateral direction,
The contact part is provided with a deceleration part (for example, a first deceleration part 7300) that can guide the falling game ball in the predetermined lateral direction while decelerating the traveling speed of the game ball,
The speed reducer is formed to initially guide the game ball in a direction different from the predetermined lateral direction,
The prize entry area and the opening/closing member are arranged in the predetermined lateral direction from the emitting section.

According to such a configuration, when a game ball that has fallen from the vertical passage hits the abutment part and is ejected from the ejection part in a predetermined horizontal direction, the speed reduction part provided in the abutment part reduces the speed of the game ball. Since the game ball is guided in a predetermined lateral direction while the advancing speed is reduced, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball and smoothly guide the game ball from the release section in the predetermined lateral direction, and furthermore, the ball is released. Multiple game balls can be sufficiently decelerated and guided continuously to a winning area located in a predetermined lateral direction from the part, and as a result, it is possible to prevent ball biting of game balls near the release part or on the opening/closing member of the winning area. Can prevent ball clogging.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, to provide a game machine that can suppress the rebound of game balls, smoothly guide the game balls in the lateral direction, and can effectively prevent the game balls from biting or clogging. I can do it.

(Appendix 4-2)
[Background technology]
This type of game machine has a merging section in the horizontal passageway in order to smoothly guide the game balls that have fallen down from above through the vertical passageway provided on the game board to the horizontal passageway along the horizontal direction. It has been proposed that the bottom surface is formed to have different inclination angles with respect to the lateral direction (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-85803).

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the game balls falling from the vertical passage hit the bottom surface of the confluence of the horizontal passage without slowing down the traveling speed much, so the game balls tend to bounce and collide with each other. There was a problem in that ball biting and ball clogging were likely to occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and is capable of suppressing the bouncing of the game ball and guiding the game ball smoothly in the horizontal direction, thereby effectively preventing ball biting and ball jamming of the game ball. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent such problems.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a ball path (for example, ball paths T1 to T5) in which game balls can roll;
a first prize area (for example, second starting port 43) in which a game ball can win on the game board;
a first opening/closing member (e.g., a blade member 8300) that can open and close the first winning area, and in the closed state can continuously guide a plurality of game balls in a direction that does not allow winning in the first winning area;
a second winning area (for example, a second grand prize opening 46) different from the first winning area in which a game ball can win on the game board;
A second opening/closing member (for example, a second grand prize opening shutter) that can open and close the second winning area, and that can continuously guide a plurality of game balls in a direction that does not allow them to win in the second winning area in the closed state. 46A),
The ball path includes a vertical path (for example, ball path T1) in which the game ball can fall,
The vertical passage is
A contact portion (for example, contact portion 7110A) that the fallen game ball hits;
A release part (for example, release part 7110B) for releasing the game ball that has reached the contact part in a predetermined lateral direction,
The contact portion is provided with a first deceleration portion (for example, a first deceleration portion 7300) that can guide the falling game ball in the predetermined lateral direction while decelerating the traveling speed of the game ball. ,
The first deceleration section is formed to initially guide the game ball in a direction different from the predetermined lateral direction,
The first winning area and the first opening/closing member are arranged in the predetermined lateral direction from the emitting part,
The second winning area and the second opening/closing member are provided below from the first winning area and the first opening/closing member via a step part (for example, a step part 7130A),
The stepped portion initially guides the falling game ball in a direction different from the predetermined lateral direction while slowing down the traveling speed of the game ball, and includes the second winning area and the second opening/closing member. It is characterized by being provided with a second deceleration part (for example, a first deceleration part 7310) that can be guided to.

According to such a configuration, when the game ball that has fallen from the vertical passage hits the abutment part and is ejected from the ejection part in a predetermined horizontal direction, the game ball is stopped by the first deceleration part provided in the abutment part. While the traveling speed of the ball is slowed down, the game ball is guided to a first winning area and a first opening/closing member located in a predetermined horizontal direction, and further falls to a stepped portion via the first winning area and first opening/closing member. Since the advancing speed of the game ball is reduced by the second deceleration part and guided to the second winning area and the second opening/closing member, bouncing of the game ball is suppressed and the game ball is smoothly transferred from the release part to the first prize. The ball can be guided to the second winning area and the second opening/closing member via the area and the first opening/closing member, and the plurality of game balls can be sufficiently decelerated and continuously guided to a plurality of consecutive winning areas. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls from biting or clogging near the ejection part or on the opening/closing member of each winning area.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the bouncing of game balls, smoothly guiding the game balls in the lateral direction, and effectively preventing ball biting and ball clogging of the game balls. I can do it.

(Appendix 5)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which decorative stickers are attached to the wall of the winning device to enhance the decorativeness (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-55292).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem in that it is difficult to specify the attachment position when attaching a decorative sticker, resulting in a decrease in the efficiency of assembly work.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in the efficiency of assembly work.
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game machine equipped with a game board (for example, game board 1, etc.) to which a ball path unit (for example, electric unit 7500, etc.) can be attached, which has a ball path in which game balls can roll,
The ball passage unit is
a surface portion (for example, ball passage cover 7520, etc.);
A ball passage (for example, guiding ball passages 7521, 7522, 7523, etc.) provided on the back side of the surface portion,
A decorative sheet (for example, decorative sheet 7530, etc.) is attached to the surface portion,
Holes (for example, holes 7525, 7535, etc.) are provided that communicate the surface portion and the decorative sheet,
The hole is provided at a position corresponding to the ball passage.

According to such a configuration, in the ball passage unit to which the decorative sheet is attached to the surface portion on which the ball passage is provided on the back side, the hole portion that communicates the surface portion and the decorative sheet is provided.
Accordingly, when attaching the decorative sheet to the surface portion during assembly work, the decorative sheet can be attached to an appropriate position on the surface portion simply by aligning the positions of the surface portion and the holes of the decorative sheet.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in the efficiency of assembly work.

Further, according to the present invention, the hole is provided at a position corresponding to the ball passage.
As a result, for example, if a ball becomes clogged in the ball passage, by inserting an operating rod or the like into the hole, it is possible to break up the lump of balls that is causing the ball jam and eliminate the ball jam. .
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in the efficiency of assembly work.

(Appendix 6)
[Background technology]
As a game machine of this type, a game machine has been proposed in which a transparent resin game board is provided with through holes for installing game nails, and the game nails are installed upright on the game board by driving the game nails into the through holes. (Refer to Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-260467).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball comes into contact with a game nail, which is an example of a game component, the game nail is charged with static electricity. However, the conventional game machine described above has a problem in that static electricity charged on such game components may be short-circuited to electronic components provided on the back side of the game board through the through holes.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent static electricity charged in gaming components from short-circuiting to electronic components.
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game machine equipped with a game board (for example, game board 1, etc.) on which a game ball can roll,
The game board is
A game component made of a metal material and capable of changing the rolling direction of a game ball (for example, a game nail 1pa, etc.);
an electronic component (e.g., passage gate switch 314, etc.) having a wiring connection part (e.g., connector 314b, etc.) connected to wiring on the back side of the game board;
The game board is provided with through holes (for example, 1 pc of holes for nails, etc.) for arranging the game components,
The game component is arranged in the through hole from the surface side of the game board,
The game board is characterized in that an isolating means (for example, a protective cover 1c, etc.) is provided on the back side of the game board to maintain a creeping distance between the wiring connection portion and the game component.

According to such a configuration, an isolation means is provided on the back side of the game board to ensure a creepage distance between the wiring connection part of the electronic component and the game component, so that the wiring between the game component and the electrical component that is charged with static electricity is removed. Since the creepage distance between the game component and the connecting portion can be increased, it is possible to prevent static electricity charged on the game component from short-circuiting to the electrical component.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent static electricity charged in gaming components from short-circuiting to electronic components.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent static electricity charged in gaming components from short-circuiting to electronic components.

(Appendix 7)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine equipped with an index and a detection sensor that detects movement of a shutter part has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-111192).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when an impact is applied to the gaming machine while the shutter part, which is a movable body, is moving, the index, which is a detection piece, and the detection sensor, which is a detection means, are activated. There has been a problem in that there is a risk that the movement of the movable body cannot be detected normally or that the detection piece or the detection means may be damaged due to interference.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A movable body (for example, decorative parts 6233, 6243, etc.) that can move from the first position to the second position;
A driving means (for example, a motor 6211, etc.) for driving the movable body;
a detection piece (for example, detection pieces 6234, 6244, etc.) that moves with the operation of the movable body;
Detection means (for example, first detection means 6221a, second detection means 6221b, etc.) for detecting the detection piece,
The detection means is arranged at a position where the detection piece can be detected when the movable body moves to the second position,
It is provided separately from the detection means (for example, a fixed part 6210, etc.), and guides the detection piece to the detection means when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position. It is characterized in that it includes a guide means (for example, an open state guide means 6215, a closed state guide means 6216, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the guide means is provided separately from the detection means and guides the detection piece to the detection means when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position.
As a result, when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, the detection piece is guided by the guide means to the detection means, so that it does not move to a position out of the detection range of the detection means. This makes it possible to avoid problems such as collisions or collisions with the detection means.
Further, since the guide means is provided separately from the detection means, even if the moving detection piece comes into contact with the guide means, the influence on the detection means can be avoided.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.

(Appendix 7-1)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine equipped with an index and a detection sensor that detects movement of a shutter part has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-111192).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when an impact is applied to the gaming machine while the shutter part, which is a movable body, is moving, the index, which is a detection piece, and the detection sensor, which is a detection means, are activated. There has been a problem in that there is a risk that the movement of the movable body cannot be detected normally or that the detection piece or the detection means may be damaged due to interference.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A movable body (for example, decorative parts 6233, 6243, etc.) that can move from the first position to the second position;
A driving means (for example, a motor 6211, etc.) for driving the movable body;
a detection piece (for example, detection pieces 6234, 6244, etc.) that moves with the operation of the movable body;
Detection means (for example, first detection means 6221a, second detection means 6221b, etc.) for detecting the detection piece,
The detection means is arranged at a position where the detection piece can be detected when the movable body moves to the second position,
Guide means (for example, open state guide means 6215, closed state guide means 6216, etc.) that guides the detection piece to the detection means when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position. Prepare,
The guide means has a groove (for example, groove 6218, etc.) into which the detection piece is inserted,
The groove portion is narrower in the groove portion formed on the end side of the guide means closer to the detection means than the groove portion formed on the end portion side of the guide means farther from the detection means (e.g. , guide portion 6218b, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, the movable body is provided with the guide means for guiding the detection piece to the detection means.
As a result, when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, the detection piece is guided by the guide means to the detection means, so that it moves to a position out of the detection range of the detection means. This makes it possible to avoid problems such as collisions or collisions with the detection means.

Further, the guide means has a groove into which the detection piece is inserted, and the groove formed at the end closer to the detection means is narrower than the groove formed at the end farther from the detection means. It is formed.
As a result, when the detection piece moves along the groove from the end farthest from the detection means to the near end, the detection piece is guided from the relatively wide groove to the relatively narrow groove. It becomes possible to guide the object to the detection means more smoothly.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.

(Appendix 7-2)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine equipped with an index and a detection sensor that detects movement of a shutter part has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-111192).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when an impact is applied to the gaming machine while the shutter part, which is a movable body, is moving, the index, which is a detection piece, and the detection sensor, which is a detection means, are activated. There has been a problem in that there is a risk that the movement of the movable body cannot be detected normally or that the detection piece or the detection means may be damaged due to interference.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A movable body (for example, decorative parts 6233, 6243, etc.) that can move from the first position to the second position;
A driving means (for example, a motor 6211, etc.) for driving the movable body;
a detection piece (for example, detection pieces 6234, 6244, etc.) that moves with the operation of the movable body;
A detection means (for example, a first detection means 6221a, a second detection means 6221b, etc.) provided on a substrate (for example, a substrate 6220, etc.) and detects the detection piece,
The detection means is arranged at a position where the detection piece can be detected when the movable body moves to the second position,
A guiding means (for example, an open state guiding means) that is provided separately from the substrate and that guides the sensing piece to the sensing means when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position. 6215, closed state guide means 6216, etc.),
The guide means is characterized in that it engages with the substrate.

According to such a configuration, when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, the movable body is provided with the guide means for guiding the detection piece to the detection means.
As a result, when the movable body moves from the first position to the second position, the detection piece is guided by the guide means to the detection means, so that it moves to a position out of the detection range of the detection means. This makes it possible to avoid problems such as collisions or collisions with the detection means.

Furthermore, since the guiding means is engaged with the substrate on which the detecting means is provided, it is possible to maintain the relative positions of the guiding means and the detecting means, and even if the guiding means moves, the detection It becomes possible to reliably guide the piece to the detection means.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.

(Appendix 7-3)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine equipped with an index and a detection sensor that detects movement of a shutter part has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-111192).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when an impact is applied to the gaming machine while the shutter part, which is a movable body, is moving, the index, which is a detection piece, and the detection sensor, which is a detection means, are activated. There has been a problem in that there is a risk that the movement of the movable body cannot be detected normally or that the detection piece or the detection means may be damaged due to interference.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A movable body (for example, a decorative part 6430, etc.) that can move between a first position and a second position;
A driving means (for example, a motor 6412, etc.) for driving the movable body;
a detection piece (for example, detection piece 6414b, etc.) that moves with the operation of the movable body;
Detection means for detecting the detection piece (for example, initial position detection means 6415, etc.);
a base part (for example, base part 6410, etc.) on which the detection means is attached,
The detection means is arranged at a position where the movable body is in the first position and can detect the detection piece,
The detection piece is disposed at a position facing the base part, and has a direction in which the detection piece comes into contact with the base part when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. It is characterized by being provided with a protrusion (for example, a protrusion 6414c, etc.) that restricts movement to.

According to such a configuration, when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position, the detection piece moves in a direction in which it comes into contact with the base part, at a position facing the base part. A protrusion is provided to restrict the
As a result, when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position, the detection piece moves in the direction in which it comes into contact with the base part, and the detection piece moves out of the detectable range of the detection means or comes into contact with the detection means. It is possible to avoid problems such as collisions.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent problems caused by collision between the detection piece and the detection means.

(Appendix 8)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine equipped with a launching means for launching a plurality of moving objects upward as a performance device has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231974).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the floating body, which is a performance object, is simply launched upward by a single launching means that is pushed upward by the biasing force of a spring, so the direction of movement of the floating body is monotonous and lacks interest. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can produce interesting performances by making it possible to move the performance body in various directions. .
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a moving means capable of moving a presentation body (for example, a presentation body 6315, etc.),
The moving means is capable of moving the presentation body to a presentation position distant from the moving means by operating from a first position to a second position,
The transportation means is
a first moving mechanism (for example, first moving mechanism 6320, etc.) capable of moving the performance body in a predetermined direction;
a second movement mechanism different from the first movement mechanism (for example, a second movement mechanism 6330, etc.);
The second moving mechanism is characterized in that it is capable of moving the performance object in a direction different from that of the first moving mechanism.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to move the performance object in a predetermined direction by the first movement mechanism, and to move it in a direction different from that of the first movement mechanism by the second movement mechanism.
As a result, the performance object can be moved in a direction different from the predetermined direction by the first movement mechanism, a direction different from the predetermined direction by the second movement mechanism, or a direction that is a combination of these directions, so that the presentation object can be moved in various directions. becomes possible.
Therefore, by making it possible to move the presentation body in various directions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting presentations.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
The performance body is composed of a plurality of performance bodies, the predetermined direction is upward, and the plurality of performance bodies are composed of a performance body that is launched upward by the first moving mechanism, and a performance body that is launched upward by the second movement mechanism. It may also include a presentation body that moves in a direction different from the above-mentioned upward direction.

According to such a configuration, the first moving mechanism launches the performance object upward, and the second moving mechanism moves the performance object in a direction different from the upward direction. Since the presentation body is diffused, a visually interesting presentation can be realized.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting performances by making it possible to move the performance body in various directions.

(Appendix 8-1)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine equipped with a launching means for launching a plurality of moving objects upward as a performance device has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231974).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the floating body, which is a performance object, is simply launched upward by a single launching means that is pushed upward by the biasing force of a spring, so the direction of movement of the floating body is monotonous and lacks interest. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can produce interesting performances by making it possible to move the performance body in various directions. .
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a moving means (for example, a launch unit 6300, etc.) capable of moving a plurality of performance bodies (for example, a performance body 6315, etc.),
The moving means is capable of moving the plurality of presentation bodies to a presentation position distant from the moving means by operating from a first position to a second position,
The transportation means is
a first moving mechanism (for example, first moving mechanism 6320, etc.) capable of moving the performance body;
a second movement mechanism different from the first movement mechanism (for example, a second movement mechanism 6330, etc.);
The plurality of performance bodies include a performance body moved by the first movement mechanism and a performance body moved by the second movement mechanism,
The second moving mechanism is capable of moving the performance object in a direction different from that of the first moving mechanism,
What are the contact surfaces with the performance body in the first moving mechanism (for example, the performance body contact surface 6321a, etc.) and the contact surfaces with the performance body in the second movement mechanism (for example, the performance body contact surface 6331a, etc.) It is adjacent to
When the moving means moves from the second position to the first position, at least a portion of the contact surface with the presentation object in the second movement mechanism is closer to the presentation object in the first movement mechanism. Since the contact surface of is located lower, some of the performance bodies out of the plurality of performance bodies that were in contact with the second moving mechanism are in a position where they are in contact with the second movement mechanism due to their own weight. It is characterized in that it can be moved from a position to a position where it contacts the first moving mechanism.

According to such a configuration, the moving means includes a first moving mechanism capable of moving the performance object, and a second moving mechanism different from the first moving mechanism. The plurality of performance bodies include a performance body that is moved by a first movement mechanism and a performance body that is moved by a second movement mechanism. The second moving mechanism can move the performance body in a direction different from that of the first moving mechanism. A contact surface with the performance body in the first moving mechanism and a contact surface with the performance body in the second movement mechanism are adjacent to each other. When the moving means moves from the second position to the first position, the surface that is in contact with the performance object is more likely to be moved during the first movement than at least a part of the surface that is in contact with the performance object in the second movement mechanism. By locating the surface of the mechanism in contact with the performance objects at a lower position, some of the performance objects among the plurality of performance objects that were in contact with the second moving mechanism may come into contact with the second movement mechanism due to their own weight. It is possible to move from the position where it was held to the position where it contacts the first moving mechanism.

As a result, when the moving means moves from the second position to the first position, a part of the presentation object is gathered by its own weight toward the contact surface with the presentation object in the first movement mechanism, and the movement means is moved from the initial position. By moving the performance object that has been moved to the performance position and gathered toward the contact surface of the first moving mechanism using different moving mechanisms, the first movement mechanism and the second movement mechanism, the performance object can be visually recognized by the player. It is possible to gather the objects in the central part where it is easy to move, and it is also possible to move the presentation objects in various directions compared to the case where the presentation objects are moved only by the first moving mechanism.
Therefore, by making it possible to move the presentation body in various directions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting presentations.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting performances by making it possible to move the performance body in various directions.

(Appendix 8-2)
[Background technology]
As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine equipped with a launching means for launching a plurality of moving objects upward as an effect device has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231974).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the conventional game machine described above, the floating body, which is a performance object, is simply launched upward by a single launching means that is pushed upward by the biasing force of a spring, so the direction of movement of the floating body is monotonous and lacks interest. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can produce interesting performances by making it possible to move the performance body in various directions. .
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a moving means (for example, a launch unit 6300, etc.) capable of moving a plurality of performance bodies (for example, a performance body 6315, etc.),
The moving means moves the plurality of performance objects within a performance area (for example, performance body movement area 6310a, etc.) to a performance position away from the movement means by operating from a first position to a second position. It is possible to move
The transportation means is
a first moving mechanism (for example, first moving mechanism 6320, etc.) capable of moving the performance body;
a pair of second movement mechanisms (for example, second movement mechanism 6330, etc.) different from the first movement mechanism;
The pair of second moving mechanisms are respectively arranged on the left and right adjacent to the first moving mechanism,
The plurality of performance bodies are
a performance body that is moved upward by the first movement mechanism from a state in which it is in contact with the first movement mechanism below a center portion in the left-right direction of the performance area;
The pair of second moving mechanisms moves diagonally upward from a state where the pair of second mechanisms is in contact with the pair of second mechanisms at the bottom of the left part or the bottom of the right part in the left-right direction of the production area toward the top of the center part. A performance body that moves.

According to such a configuration, the moving means includes a first moving mechanism capable of moving the performance body, and a pair of second moving mechanisms different from the first moving mechanism, and the moving means includes a pair of second moving mechanisms that are different from the first moving mechanisms. The mechanisms are arranged on the left and right sides adjacent to the first moving mechanism. The plurality of performance bodies are arranged such that the first movement mechanism moves the performance body upward from a state in which it is in contact with the first movement mechanism below the central part in the horizontal direction of the performance area, and the second movement mechanism A production element that moves diagonally upward toward the center part from a state in which it is in contact with a pair of second mechanisms below the left part or below the right part in the left-right direction of the production area by the mechanism; .

As a result, the moving means is operated from the first position to the second position, and a part of the plurality of presentation objects is moved upward in the center by the first movement mechanism. By moving another part of the stage obliquely upward toward the center part using a pair of second moving mechanisms, the performance body can be moved in a variety of ways compared to when the performance body is moved only by the first movement mechanism. It is possible to move it in any direction.
Therefore, by making it possible to move the presentation body in various directions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting presentations.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide interesting performances by making it possible to move the performance body in various directions.

(Appendix 9)
[Background technology]
As this type of game machine, a game machine equipped with a production device in which a movable body held in left and right guide rail grooves can move up and down on the front surface of the game board has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-136256). ).
[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the gaming machine is transported or when an impact is applied to the gaming machine, the central part of the movable body, which is a movable member, bends, causing the movable body to collide with other parts. There was a problem that it could cause a malfunction.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can prevent breakdowns due to collisions with other parts even if a movable member bends.
[Means to solve the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A movable body (for example, a decorative part 6253, etc.) that can move in the vertical direction, a driving means (for example, a motor 6211, etc.) for driving the movable body, and a support that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the movable body. A presentation device including a member (for example, a frame portion 6251, etc.) and a pair of holding members (for example, a holding member 6210B, etc.) capable of holding the supporting member while moving it in accordance with the movement of the movable body. A gaming machine,
It has a housing part (for example, a housing part 6250a, etc.) that can house at least a part of the support member inside,
The holding member is provided on both end sides of the accommodating part so as to sandwich the movable body,
The support member supports the movable body from the end side, and also includes a movement restriction portion (for example, a movement restriction portion 6254) that can slide on the housing portion while restricting rearward movement of the movable body. It is characterized by being provided with.

According to such a configuration, the movable body that is movable in the vertical direction is supported by the support member from both end sides, and in the support member, at least a part of the support member is restricted while the rearward movement of the movable body is restricted. A storage part that can be stored inside and a movement restriction part that can be slid are provided.
As a result, even if a force is generated to move the movable body backwards, and this force causes the movable body or the support member that supports the movable body to wag, the movement restriction section will prevent the movable body from moving backwards. This makes it possible to prevent the movable body and the support member from colliding with the housing section.
Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent breakdowns due to collisions with other parts even if the movable member bends.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent breakdowns due to collisions with other parts even if a movable member bends.

1 Game board 1c Protective cover 1pa Game nail 1pb Switch hole 314 Passing gate switch 314b Connector 6210 Fixed part 6210B Holding member 6211 Motor 6215 Open state guide means 6216 Closed state guide means 6218 Groove 6218b Guide portion 6220 Board base 6221a First detection means 6221b Second detection means 6233 Decoration part 6234 Detection piece 6243 Decoration part 6244 Detection piece 6250a Accommodation part 6251 Frame part 6253 Decoration part 6254 Movement regulating part 6300 Launching unit 6315 Direction body 6320 First moving mechanism 6321a Direction body contact surface 6330 Second movement Mechanism 6331a Direction body contact surface 6412 Motor 6414b Detection piece 6414c Projection part 6415 Initial position detection means 6430 Decoration part 7500 Electric unit 7520 Ball passage cover 7521 Guide ball passage 7522 Guide ball passage 7523 Guide ball passage 7525 Hole 7530 Decorative sheet 7535 Hole Department

Claims (1)

A game machine equipped with a game board on which a game ball can roll,
The game board is
A plurality of game parts formed of a chargeable member and capable of changing the rolling direction of the game ball;
an electronic component including a wiring connection part connected to wiring on the back side of the game board;
a first hole for arranging a first game component;
a second hole for arranging a second game component different from the first game component;
a third hole formed near the first hole and the second hole for arranging a member including the electronic component;
The first game component is disposed in the first hole from the front side of the game board,
The second game component is disposed in the second hole from the front side of the game board,
On the back side of the game board, at least a portion thereof is provided over the inside of the third hole, and a first wire is connected from the first game component to the wiring connection portion via the first hole. An insulating member is provided for taking a creepage distance and a second creepage distance from the second game component to the wiring connection portion via the second hole ,
The insulating member is
an inner contact portion that contacts the electronic component;
an outer contact portion that contacts the game board so as to cover an outer peripheral portion of the third hole;
A game machine characterized in that at least a portion of the inner contact portion comes into contact with the electronic component at a portion that protrudes further toward the back side of the game board from the back side of the game board .

Images